ABB RobotWare 5.0 Robot Application Builder Application manual

Application manual

Robot Application Builder

Industrial Software Products

RobotWare 5.0

Application manual

Robot Application Builder

RobotWare 5.0

Document ID: 3HAC028083-001

Revision: D

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.

Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.

In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein.

This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted.

Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

© Copyright 2007 - 2009 ABB All rights reserved.

ABB AB

Robotics Products

SE-721 68 Västerås

Sweden

Table of Contents

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Product documentation, M2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1 Introduction 13

1.1 About Robot Application Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1.2 Documentation and help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.3 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2 Installation and development environment 21

2.1 Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.2 How to obtain and install a license key for RAB 5.09 or earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.3 How to set up your PC to robot communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.4 Development environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.5 Two development models - virtual and real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.6 Conversion of VS 2005 projects to Visual Studio 2008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3 Run-time environment 35

3.1 Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.2 Running PC Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.2.1 Licence verification - applies only to versions earlier than RAB 5.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3.2.2 Mastership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.2.3 PC application configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

3.2.4 Communication between PC and controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.3 Running FlexPendant Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.3.1 Components, assemblies and dlls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.3.2 Deployment of FlexPendant application to a robot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3.3.3 Communication between FlexPendant and controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.3.4 Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

3.3.5 FlexPendant TpsView attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3.3.6 ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.4 Release upgrades and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4 Developing RAB applications 63

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.2 Analysis and design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.3 Controller events and threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.4 User Authorization System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.5 Exception handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.6 How to use the online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK 77

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.1.1 About this chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.1.2 System features supporting the use of customized screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

5.2 Setting up a new project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.2.1 Using the project template in Visual Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.2.2 Setting up design support for FlexPendant controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5.3 Building the user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

5.3.1 Introduction to visual design support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

5.3.2 GUI controls and memory management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

5.3.3 Container style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.3.4 Command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 3

Table of Contents

5.3.5 FlexPendant fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

5.3.6 The use of icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.3.7 TabControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.3.8 Button, TextBox and ComboBox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.3.9 AlphaPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

5.3.10 ListView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5.3.11 CompactAlphaPad and NumPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

5.3.12 GTPUMessageBox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.3.13 GTPUFileDialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

5.3.14 DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.4 Launching other views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

5.4.1 Using launch service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

5.4.2 Using standard dialogs to modify data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

5.5 Using the Controller API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.5.1 ABB.Robotics.Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

5.5.2 Accessing the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

5.5.3 Rapid domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

5.5.3.1 Working with RAPID data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

5.5.3.2 Handling RAPID arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

5.5.3.3 ReadItem and WriteItem methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.5.3.4 UserDefined data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.5.3.5 RAPID symbol search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.5.3.6 RAPID execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

5.5.3.7 Modifying modules and programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

5.5.4 IO system domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.5.5 Event log domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

5.5.6 Motion domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

5.5.7 File system domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5.5.8 System info domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6 Robust FlexPendant applications 181

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

6.2 Memory management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

6.3 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

6.4 Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7 Using the PC SDK 199

7.1 Controller API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

7.2 Create a simple PC SDK application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

7.3 Discovery domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7.4 Accessing the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

7.5 Rapid domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.5.1 Working with RAPID data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7.5.2 Handling arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

7.5.3 ReadItem and WriteItem methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

7.5.4 UserDefined data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

7.5.5 RAPID symbol search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

7.5.6 Working with RAPID modules and programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

7.5.7 Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

7.6 IO system domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

7.7 Event log domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

7.8 Motion domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

7.9 File system domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

7.10 Messaging domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

4 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Table of Contents

8 Debugging and troubleshooting 279

8.1 FlexPendant - Debugging and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

8.1.1 Debug output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

8.1.2 Debugging the virtual FlexPendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

8.1.3 Debugging the FlexPendant device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

8.1.4 Troubleshooting FlexPendant applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

8.2 PC - Debugging and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8.2.1 Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8.2.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application 299

9.1 Adding support for several languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

10 Packaging RAB applications 309

10.1 Deployment of a PC SDK application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

10.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

10.2 Deployment of a FlexPendant SDK application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

10.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

10.2.2 Deployment of an application without a license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

10.2.3 Deployment of a licensed application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

10.2.4 Deployment using FTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 5

Overview

Overview

About this manual

Robot Application Builder (RAB) is a software tool, which enables programmers to develop customized operator interfaces for the IRC5 robot controller.

The purpose of this manual is to help software developers get started with RAB application development.

Usage

Robot Application Builder targets two different platforms. To develop a FlexPendant application you use the FlexPendant SDK. To develop a PC application, on the other hand, you use the PC SDK. This manual covers application development using both of these SDKs.

Who should read this manual?

This manual is mainly intended for software developers, who use RAB to create robot applications adapted to end-user needs, but is also useful for anyone who needs an overview of Robot Application Builder.

Prerequisites

The reader should

• be familiar with IRC5, the FlexPendant and Robot Studio.

• be used to Microsoft Visual Studio and Windows programming.

• be familiar with one of the .NET programming languages C# or Visual Basic.NET. For

PC applications Visual J# and Visual C++ should also work.

• be used to object oriented programming.

Organization of chapters

Most chapters in this manual deal with topics that apply to both platforms (PC and

FlexPendant). Chapter 5, 6 and 9, however, cover the FlexPendant SDK specifically, whereas chapter 7 deals only with the PC SDK. Code samples are written in C# and Visual Basic. The manual is organized as follows:

Chapter

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Contents

Introduction. Terminology. Safety.

Installation and setup. Development environment . Virtual robot technology.

Two run-time platforms: PC and FlexPendant. Selecting the platform. Software architecture. Run-time environment for PC/FlexPendant applications. How clients access controller resources and communicate with the robot controller.

Application configuration. Life cycle of a FlexPendant application. Upgrades and compatibility.

Developing RAB applications. Analysis and design. Important programming issues: controller events and threads, UAS, exception handling. Online help.

Using the FlexPendant SDK. Visual design support. GUI controls. Launching standard views. Data binding. How to add controller functionality using the

Controller API. Programming issues and code samples in VB and C#.

How to develop well performing and robust FlexPendant applications. Memory management, performance and reliability. Exception handling.

Continues on next page

7

Overview

Continued

References

Revisions

Chapter

7.

8.

9.

10.

Contents

Using the PC SDK. How to add controller functionality using the Controller

API. Programming issues and code samples in VB and C#.

Testing, debugging and troubleshooting RAB applications. Using printouts, error codes in exceptions etc. Checklist for contacting a service organization.

How to add support for several languages to a custom FlexPendant application.

How to deploy RAB applications. How to create an additional option and how to make a product of a FlexPendant application.

Reference Document Id

Operating Manual -IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC 16590-1

Operating Manual - RobotStudio 3HAC032104-001

Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types

3HAC16581-1

A

B

-

Revision Description

C

First edition

From RAB 5.08 onwards this manual replaces:

Robot Application Builder - PC SDK User's Guide (3HAC 024913-001) and

Robot Application Builder - FlexPendant SDK User's Guide (3HAC 024914-

001)

Improvements and updates for RAB 5.09.

Additions and further improvements for RAB 5.10:

Installation chapter: no license required, working with several PC SDK versions. (2.1- 2.2)

PC application configuration, how to use App.config. (3.2.3)

TpsFont

internally retrieves appropriate font for the active language, e.g.

Chinese (5.3.5).

The operating system of the first generation FlexPendant device (SX TPU 1) does not support images of more than 256 colors. (5.3.6, 8.1.4)

New FP SDK domain SystemInfoDomain (5.5.8).

Maximum size of an FP SDK application (6.1).

No initial events guaranteed (4.3, 5.5.2, 5.5.4, 7.3, 7.6).

Create a simple PC SDK application (7.2).

FP and PC SDK Controller API, working with RAPID data. (5.5.3.1 and 7.5.1).

High priority event subscriptions in PC SDK (7.5.1).

New PC SDK domain Messaging (7.10).

Troubleshooting PC SDK applications (8.2.2).

Localizing a FlexPendant application (9).

Improvements and updates for RAB 5.11.

New installation described in Installation overview (2.1)(

8

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Overview

Continued

Revision Description

D Additions and improvements for RAB 5.12:

RobotStudio Community (1.2)

Some details about installing RAB on Windows Vista (2.1)

Description of improved Project Wizard (3.3.5 and 5.3.3)

Removed obsolete section about

TpsFont.FontName

(5.3.5)

How to access user defined data (5.5.3.4 and 7.5.4)

SearchRapidSymbol (5.5.3.5 and 7.5.5)

How to access data declared in Shared module (5.5.3.4, 5.5.3.5 and 7.5.4,

7.5.5)

Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC (7.5.7)

Messaging - new system parameter RmqMode (7.10).

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 9

Product documentation, M2004

Product documentation, M2004

General

The robot documentation may be divided into a number of categories. This listing is based on the type of information contained within the documents, regardless of whether the products are standard or optional. This means that any given delivery of robot products will not contain all documents listed, only the ones pertaining to the equipment delivered.However, all documents listed may be ordered from ABB. The documents listed are valid for M2004 robot systems.

However, all documents listed may be ordered from ABB. The documents listed are valid for

M2004 robot systems.

Product manuals

All hardware, robots and controllers, are delivered with a Product manual, which is divided into two parts:

Product manual, procedures

•

Safety information

• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation, electrical connections)

•

Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures including intervals)

• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts)

•

Additional procedures, if any (calibration, decommissioning)

Product manual, reference information

•

Safety information

• Reference information (article numbers for documentation referred to in Product manual, procedures, lists of tools, safety standards)

•

Part list

• Foldouts or exploded views

•

Circuit diagrams

The product manual published as a PDF consists of only one file where the two parts are presented together, as one Product manual.

Technical reference manuals

The following manuals describe the robot software in general and contain relevant reference information:

Product manual, procedures

• RAPID overview: An overview of the RAPID programming language.

•

RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types: Description and syntax for all

RAPID instructions, functions and data types.

• System parameters: Description of system parameters and configuration workflow

10

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Product documentation, M2004

Continued

Application manuals

Specific applications (e.g. software or hardware options) are described in Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several applications.

An application manual generally contains information about:

•

The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful)

• What is included (e.g. cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system parameters, CD with PC software)

•

How to use the application

• Examples of how to use the application

Operating manuals

This group of manuals is aimed at those having first hand operational contact with the robot, i.e. production cell operators, programmers and trouble shooters. It includes:

•

Getting started - IRC5 and RobotStudio

•

IRC5 with FlexPendant

• RobotStudio

•

Trouble shooting

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 11

Safety

Safety

Safety of personnel

A robot is heavy and extremely powerful regardless of its speed. A pause or long stop in movement can be followed by a fast hazardous movement. Even if a pattern of movement is predicted, a change in operation can be triggered by an external signal resulting in an unexpected movement.Therefore, it is important that all safety regulations are followed when entering safeguarded space.

Safety of regulations

Before beginning work with the robot, make sure you are familiar with the safety regulations described in Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant.

12 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

1 Introduction

1 Introduction

Safety

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 13

1 Introduction

1.1. About Robot Application Builder

1.1. About Robot Application Builder

Flexible user interfaces

Robots are usually delivered with a general operator interface. However, different processes require different operator handling and customers need flexible solutions, where the user interface is adapted to user specific needs.

Robot Application Builder (RAB) allows system integrators, third parties or end-users to add their own customized operator interfaces for the IRC5 controller. Such custom applications can either be added to the standard views of the FlexPendant or realized as independent PC applications, which communicate with the robot controller over a network.

To accommodate this, RAB includes the following two components:

• FlexPendant SDK

•

PC SDK

NOTE!

RAB applications are not platform independent. You must choose to develop the application for either the FlexPendant or the PC platform.

Ease-of-use on the factory floor

A well-designed user interface presents relevant information and functionality at the right time. In this respect, customized user interfaces are clearly very desirable to the end-user. As tailored solutions are easier to operate, they also optimize user’s investment in automation.

RAB is the tool enabling customized user interfaces for IRC5. It is important to keep in mind, however, that RAB itself does not guarantee increased customer value. To achieve this, RAB applications should be developed with care and with a heavy emphasis placed on ease-of-use.

Understanding end-users’ needs is in fact crucial to realizing the benefits of customized interfaces.

14

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

1 Introduction

1.1. About Robot Application Builder

Continued

.NET and Visual Studio

Robot Application Builder uses Microsoft .NET and Microsoft Visual Studio. It is thus assumed that the user knows how to program Windows platforms using Visual Studio.

Among programmers .NET distinguishes itself by the programming model provided by the

Microsoft .NET Framework. The programming model is very similar for the two run-time platforms supported by Robot Application Builder.

One feature is the programming language independence, leaving the choice to the developer to use any language provided by the integrated development environment Visual Studio. Most prefer C# or Visual Basic, which both offer safe and efficient development. For FlexPendant applications only these two languages are available. For PC applications any of the .NET languages should work, but ABB support is only offered for Visual Basic and C#.

For a Windows programmer familiar with Visual Studio and .NET, developing a customized operator view is rather straight-forward. RAB is fully integrated with Visual Studio, which means that a .NET programmer will recognize wizards for project setup and tools for visual design support and debug etc.

Considerable efforts have been made to allow RAB programmers to start working without having to overcome a steep learning curve. To further speed up the development process, the virtual IRC5 of RobotStudio can be used to test and debug RAB applications.

NOTE!

Some knowledge in Windows programming, object orientation and a .NET programming language is necessary to be able to use Robot Application Builder.

Robustness and performance

Do not underestimate the concern and effort required to achieve the quality and performance needed in industry.

Developing an application for the FlexPendant, a device with limited process and memory resources, can be quite demanding. Issues such as performance and memory management need to be addressed.

As for PC SDK applications as well, there are issues related to performance and reliability that you need to know about before getting started.

In short, even if you are an experienced Windows programmer, you are strongly recommended to read this manual to learn about specific RAB issues when moving to RAB development.

NOTE!

Take the time to study this manual along with the release notes, and avoiding rushing into coding.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 15

1 Introduction

1.2. Documentation and help

1.2. Documentation and help

Introduction

Robot Application Builder includes an extensive on-line help module, which comes with the installation of the product. After having installed RAB, by clicking Windows’ Start menu, then pointing at Programs > ABB Industrial IT > Robotics IT > Robot Application Builder

5.xx you will find:

• User’s Guide - Application manual - Robot Application Builder

•

FP SDK Reference

• PC SDK Reference

•

FP StyleGuide

User’s Guide

This user’s guide, Application manual - Robot Application Builder, is the recommended way to get started if you are new to RAB development. It explains how RAB works. It has code examples in C# and VB and provides hands-on exercises.

The user’s guide is provided in two formats, Html Help and PDF. Html is the recommended format for the PC screen and PDF is the best choice if you want printouts.

SDK Reference Help

The SDK Reference Help files should be used while programming.

Notice that the FlexPendant SDK and the PC SDK have separate help files:

• FP SDK Reference

•

PC SDK Reference

These make up the complete reference to the RAB class libraries. Method signatures are provided in C# and Visual Basic.

Please note that they are not integrated with the Visual Studio Help function. Pressing F1 when pointing at code, for example, will open the Visual Studio Programmer’s Reference or the .NET Framework Class Library for the specific language and topic. Many times this is what you want, but if your problem is RAB-related you need to open the appropriate SDK

Reference Help to find a solution.

NOTE!

You are recommended to keep the help files open while programming, as you will frequently need them for RAB-related issues.

FP StyleGuide

NOTE!

User’s Guide.PDF can be found in the installation directory, at \Program Files\ABB Industrial

IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application Builder 5.xx\.

16

Good usability is achieved when the program itself communicates possible actions and how to perform them. To encourage careful design of the visual appearance the FP StyleGuide is also part of the RAB installation. It is ABB Robotics’ best practices for visual design of the

FlexPendant user interface.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

1 Introduction

1.2. Documentation and help

Continued

RobotStudio Community

In 2008 ABB Robotics launched a new site, RobotStudio Community, for its PC Software users. The Developer Section of RobotStudio Community has information and some videos about programming with the FlexPendant and PC SDKs. At Content Sharing there is a complete FlexPendant SDK application available for download. It is recommended for average users and for beginners.

ABB encourage open conversations and believe everyone has something to contribute. The

User Forum of RobotStudio Community has a section dedicated to Robot Application

Builder. Here beginners as well as experts discuss code and solutions online. If you are facing a coding problem the User Forum should be your first choice, as there is a good chance that someone will give you the help you need to proceed.

RobotStudio Community also provides the means to share code and videos. Your contribution will be appreciated. Working together is many times the key to success.

RobotStudio Community is also where you find RAB releases for free download.

TIP!

Try it out at www.abb.com/robotics > RobotStudio Community.

RAB Product Specification

The product specification for Robot Application Builder (3HAC025595-001) is available from RobotStudio Community and from ABB Library. It is updated for each new release.

MSDN

MSDN (Microsoft Developer Network) at www.msdn.com is a one of many sources of information for general programming issues related to .NET and Visual Studio.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 17

1 Introduction

1.3. Terminology

1.3. Terminology

About terms and acronyms

Some terms used in this manual are product specific and crucial for understanding. Moreover, acronyms, words formed from initial letters, are sometimes used instead of long terms. To avoid confusion, important terminology is clarified below.

Definitions

Term Definition

IRC5

Virtual IRC5

ABB’s new generation robot controller.

Virtual robot technology makes it possible to run a virtual IRC5 controller, virtual mechanical units and a virtual FlexPendant on the desktop. Included as freeware in ABB’s RobotStudio from

RAB 5.11.

FlexPendant ABB’s new generation hand held device, used with the IRC5 robot controller. It is developed with Microsoft’s latest technology for embedded systems, Windows CE and .NET

Compact Framework.

Device The FlexPendant is a “smart device” in the .NET vocabulary, i.e. a complete computer in itself with its own processor, operating system etc.

Robot Application Builder ABB software tool, which enables the development of custom operator interfaces for IRC5. Often referred to as RAB.

RAB programmer A programmer who uses RAB to develop custom applications.

RAB application

Controller Application

Programming Interface

Network socket

Microsoft Visual Studio

A custom application developed with Robot Application Builder.

The public class libraries of Robot Application Builder, which offer robot controller functionality. Also referred to as CAPI.

A communication end-point unique to a machine communicating on an Internet Protocol-based network.

The integrated development environment that developers work inside when using the .NET Framework.

Microsoft .NET Framework An integral Windows component supporting the building and running of applications.

.NET Compact Framework

(.NET CF)

Version of Microsoft's .NET framework providing the run-time environment for applications running on embedded devices, such as the FlexPendant. It includes a class library, which is almost a subset of the rich .NET framework for the desktop.

Common Language

Runtime

The core runtime engine in the .NET Framework for execution of managed code. Provides services such as cross-language integration, code access security, object lifetime management, and debugging and profiling support.

C# and Visual Basic.NET

.NET programming languages.

Windows CE managed code

The embedded operating system running on the FlexPendantdevice.

Code that is executed and managed by the Microsoft .NET

Framework’s common language runtime. All code produced by

Visual Studio executes as managed code.

18

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Acronym

CAPI

CLR

GUI

MSDN

VS

RAB

SDK

VB

TAF

TCP/IP

Term

unmanaged code

JIT compiler

1 Introduction

1.3. Terminology

Continued

Definition

Code that is executed directly by the operating system, outside the .NET Framework. Unmanaged code must provide its own memory management, type checking, and security support, unlike managed code, which receives these services from the common language runtime. All code executing in the robot controller, as well as part of the code executing in the

FlexPendant is unmanaged.

When compiling managed code, the compiler translates the source code into Microsoft Intermediate Language (MSIL), which is a CPU-independent set of instructions. Before code can be executed, MSIL must be converted to CPU-specific code, usually by a just-in-time (JIT) compiler.

Definition

Controller Application Programming Interface

Common Language Runtime

Graphical User Interface

Microsoft Developer Network, source of information for .NET developers at: http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-au/netframework/default.aspx

Visual Studio

Robot Application Builder

Software Development Kit

Visual Basic

Teach Pendant Application Framework, all applications using

the FlexPendant SDK must run as TAF clients. See

TAF -

Application host framework on page 52

for detailed information.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and Internet Protocol (IP)

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 19

1 Introduction

1.3. Terminology

20 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

1.3. Terminology

2 Installation and development environment

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 21

2 Installation and development environment

2.1. Installation overview

2.1. Installation overview

About this section

This section describes how to install Robot Application Builder. When the installation is complete, you can program, compile and test PC and FlexPendant applications for the IRC5 controller.

Supported platforms

The following software requirements have to be met:

•

Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP + SP2 or Windows Vista + SP1

• Microsoft Visual Studio: VS 2005 (Standard Edition or better is required to use the FP

SDK) or VS 2008 (Professional Edition or better is required to use the FP SDK). To use the PC SDK Standard or Express edition will do.

The following hardware requirement have to be met:

• 50 MB free disc-space on the installation disc

Both FlexPendant generations are supported:

• SxTPU-1, which executes with .NET CF 2.0 and WinCE 4.2.

•

SxTPU-2, which executes with .NET CF 2.0 and WinCE 5.0.

NOTE!

When installing RAB on Windows Vista OS you may get a Visual Studio error message saying “The operation could not be completed. The requested operation requires elevation”.

This error is due to failure of the installation of the FP SDK templates and project wizard, which is prevented when Vista's User Account Control (UAC) feature is enabled. To solve the problem you need to uninstall RAB, disable UAC, reinstall RAB, then re-enable UAC (if desired). It is now possible to use the Project Wizard and create a FlexPendant project.

NOTE!

Robot Application Builder is developed and tested for the English version of Visual Studio.

If you are running Visual Studio in another language you are therefore recommended to switch to the English version.

Requirements for installing and using Robot Application Builder

To install and use Robot Application Builder, the following requirements have to be met. Also make sure that you have administrator permissions on the computer that you are using.

Before...

you must...

installing Robot Application Builder install RobotStudio and Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or 2008.

Note! If you are running under windows Vista you need to disable Vista’s User Account Control (UAC) feature. debugging using a virtual IRC5 learn how to run the virtual IRC5 in RobotStudio.

22

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.1. Installation overview

Continued

Before...

you must...

debugging using the real

FlexPendant device executing the application targeting a real IRC5 system install the .NET Compact Framework 2.0 Service Pack

1 or 2, which can be downloaded from http:// www.microsoft.com/downloads. The User Forum has information on how to attach the Visual Studio debugger to the device. See also

Debugging the

FlexPendant device on page 286

.

check that the robot system has the controller option

PC Interface (for PC applications) or FlexPendant

Interface (for FlexPendant applications).

set up a connection between your PC and the robot

controller. See

How to set up your PC to robot communication on page 27

for details about how this is done.

NOTE!

The Visual Studio installation installs .NET and Compact Framework 2.0.

About the Robot Application Builder installation

The RAB installation includes both PC and FlexPendant SDK. It is distributed as freeware on the RobotWare DVD. It can also be downloaded for free along with robotware and

RobotStudio from http://www.abb.com/robotics > RobotStudioCommunity >To Download page >Developer Tools > Robot Application Builder.

For RAB 5.11, the installation was simplified. Before, any existing PC SDK was upgraded when a later RAB was installed. This is no longer the case; both SDK:s will now be installed side-by-side with any existing installation. This section describes the installation of RAB 5.11 and later.

RAB 5.11and later

RAB 5.11 and later installs PC SDK and FP SDK side by side with any previously installed versions. This makes it easier to work with several versions of the PC SDK on a single computer.

The figure below shows what it looks like when clicking the Window’s Start button of a PC that has both RAB 5.10 and RAB 5.11 installed.

2.1_0

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

23

2 Installation and development environment

2.1. Installation overview

Continued

RAB 5.10

RAB 5.10 upgraded any previously installed PC SDK to 5.10 and installed FlexPendant SDK

5.08, 5.09 and 5.10 side-by-side. The reason for the side-by-side installation of several FP

SDK versions was to make it easier for FP SDK users to work on FP SDK applications targeting different RobotWare versions. Today, as the use of RAB is free of charge you can just download any version you need, and work with several versions on your PC if you need to. Earlier RAB releases can be downloaded from http://www.abb.com/robotics >

RobotStudioCommunity >Developer Tools > Robot Application Builder Overview.

What is installed?

The installation generates the following features on your PC:

•

SDK assemblies and resources

• This User’s Guide (Application manual - Robot Application Builder)

•

FlexPendant Style Guide

• PC SDK Reference

•

FP SDK Reference

Working with several versions

A RAB application normally targets a specific RobotWare release. Assuming that you are developing a FP SDK application for a new customer, who will use RW 5.12 and at the same time you are maintaining an existing FP SDK application for a customer whose robot system uses RW 5.09. You will then need to work with two different RAB releases on your PC. See

Release upgrades and compatibility on page 60

for details about releases and compatibility.

FlexPendant applications

If you install RAB 5.10 and RAB 5.12 you will have FP SDK 5.08, 5.09, 5.10 and 5.12 on your PC. You choose which FP SDK version to use when you set up your application project in Visual Studio. See

Using the project template in Visual Studio on page 80

for detailed information.

You should make sure that the FP SDK GUI controls the Visual Studio Designer uses is of the same version. If you have worked with another FP SDK version before, you will need to remove the GUI controls that you have added to the Visual Studio Toolbox and then add them again, pointing to the correct version in the browser. See

Setting up design support for

FlexPendant controls on page 83

for details.

From RAB 5.10 no license is required to develop, build or run RAB applications.To be able to use the 5.08 or 5.09 FP SDK versions of the 5.10 release, however, you will need to install a license key. RAB license keys are no longer available via the order form or SoFa, but ABB’s software support organization can supply a license key at no charge if necessary.

PC applications

If you install RAB 5.10 and RAB 5.12, PC SDK 5.10 and 5.12 will exist on your PC. You choose which PC SDK version to use when adding PC SDK references to your application project in Visual Studio (browse to the installation directory that matches the version when adding the PC SDK references to the project). You should also set the Reference Property

Specific Version to true to ensure that the correct version of the PC SDK dlls in the Global

Assembly Cache (GAC) is used in run-time.

24

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.1. Installation overview

Continued

Installation procedure

The installation procedure is very simple. An installation wizard will guide you through it.

NOTE!

Click Window’s Start button and locate the Robot Application Builder folder when the installation is ready (Start >Programs >ABB Industrial IT > Robotics IT >Robot Application

Builder 5.XX). This is where you find the user documentation: User’s guide, FP Style Guide and the PC and FP SDK References.

You are also strongly advised to study the Release Notes that you will find on the RW DVD and on the web, as these hold the most up-to-date information, including new features and any known limitations of the release.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 25

2 Installation and development environment

2.2. How to obtain and install a license key for RAB 5.09 or earlier

2.2. How to obtain and install a license key for RAB 5.09 or earlier

Overview

In RAB 5.10 the license check was removed from the software, which allows anyone to use

Robot Application Builder for free. This means you do no longer need to bother about getting a license, or including a licx file in your PC application.

NOTE!

For RAB version 5.09 and earlier, licensing is the second part of the installation procedure.

In case you need to develop a RAB application for RW 5.09 or earlier you need to turn to support to get a free license key.

Install licence key

Follow these steps when you have received the e-mail with the license key file:

Step Action

1

2

3

Detach the license key file from the e-mail and save it to a folder on your PC.

Double-click the license key file. This opens the License Install Wizard.

Follow the instructions in the wizard.

NOTE!

To execute RAB applications towards a real robot controller you must connect your PC to the robot controller, either via a network or directly to the service port on the controller. For

detailed information, see

How to set up your PC to robot communication on page 27

.

26 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.3. How to set up your PC to robot communication

2.3. How to set up your PC to robot communication

Overview

This section describes how to connect your PC to the robot controller.

You can either connect the PC to the controller via an Ethernet network or directly to the controller service port. When using the controller service port, you can either obtain an IP address for the PC automatically, or you can specify a fixed IP address.

When the PC and the controller are connected correctly, the controller is automatically detected by RobotStudio.

NOTE!

A PC SDK application requires RobotStudio or ABB Robot Communications Runtime to connect to a controller in run-time. The latter is included in the RAB installation. If

RobotStudio is not (and will not be) installed on your PC, you must run the Setup.exe located at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application Builder

5.xx\redistributable\RobotCommunicationRuntime.

Why is a connection needed?

Connecting the PC to the controller is necessary for all online tasks performed in

RobotStudio: downloading a robot system or files to the controller, editing configuration files, programming and so on.

It is necessary for executing a RAB PC application targeting a real robot controller.

The connection is also used for downloading a FlexPendant application to the controller file system and test it on the real FlexPendant device.

It also enables you to communicate with the controller by means of a console window on the

PC and get valuable information about controller status, FlexPendant memory consumption and the like.

Ethernet network connection

If the controller is connected to an Ethernet network, you can connect the PC to that network as well. The settings to use on the PC depends on the network configuration. To find out how to set up your PC, contact the network administrator.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

27

2 Installation and development environment

2.3. How to set up your PC to robot communication

Continued

Service port connection with automatic IP address

An alternative to network connection is using the controller service port. It has a DHCP server that automatically gives your PC an IP address if it is configured for this. See Windows Help on Configure TCP/IP settings for detailed information about configuring the PC to obtain an

IP address automatically.

NOTE!

Obtaining an IP address automatically might fail if the PC already has an IP address from another controller or Ethernet device. To make sure that you get a correct IP address if the PC has already been connected to an Ethernet device, do one of the following:

• Restart the PC before connecting to the controller.

•

Run the command “ipconfig /renew” from the command prompt after connecting the

PC to the controller

Service port connection with fixed IP address

Instead of obtaining an IP address automatically, you can specify a fixed IP address on the PC you connect to the controller.

Use the following settings for connecting with a fixed IP address:

Property Value

IP address

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

192.168.125.2

255.255.255.0

192.168.125.1

Related information

For information about

How to set up PC network connections

How to connect the PC to the Controller service port

See

Windows Help - Configure TCP/IP settings.

Connect a PC to the Service Port in the

RobotStudio help.

28 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.4. Development environment

2.4. Development environment

Overview

This section presents an overview of the development environment used to create RAB applications for PC or the FlexPendant. In either case, you program and debug the application using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or 2008.

Microsoft .NET and Microsoft Visual Studio

Microsoft Visual Studio is supported by the .NET Framework. A core component of the .NET

Framework is the common language runtime (CLR). It manages code execution, threads and memory, while also enforcing type safety.

Another major component is the Base Class Library, which is a comprehensive, objectoriented collection of reusable types. To become a skilled .NET programmer it is essential to learn the functionality offered by the Base Class Library.

It is not in the scope of this manual to teach how to use Visual Studio. For this purpose Msdn

(Microsoft Developer Network) at http://msdn.microsoft.com is a useful source of information.

NOTE!

From RAB 5.11 Visual Studio 2008 is also supported. See

Conversion of VS 2005 projects to

Visual Studio 2008 on page 33

for information about upgrading an existing RAB project to

Visual Studio 2008.

Visual design support and data binding

The most significant improvement of Robot Application Builder with Visual Studio 2005 was the visual design support for FlexPendant applications. Thanks to enhanced abilities of the

.NET Compact Framework 2.0. for building user interfaces, FlexPendant specific controls are available in the Visual Studio toolbox since RAB 5.08.

Another very useful feature of .NET CF 2.0 is data binding, which allows you to connect a

RapidDataBindingSource

or a

SignalBindingSource

to a GUI control without having to write a single line of code. (Except the

Dispose

call when the binding sources are no longer needed.)

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

29

2 Installation and development environment

2.4. Development environment

Continued

Choosing a programming language

Together with Visual Basic, C# is the most widely used.NET language.

C# is an object-oriented language derived from C, with some features from C++, Java and

Visual Basic. It was designed for .NET and offers the power and richness of C++ along with the productivity of Visual Basic. Both PC and FlexPendant SDK are implemented using C#.

As for FlexPendant SDK applications only C# and Visual Basic are supported. As for PC

SDK applications, on the other hand, any of the .NET languages can be used. ABB support, however, is offered only in C# and Visual Basic. Likewise, in this manual there are code samples in C# and Visual Basic, but none in J# or Visual C++.

At run-time it does not matter which language you have used, as compiled .NET code is language independent. The source code compiles from a high-level language into

Intermediate Language (IL), which is then executed, at runtime, by the Common Language

Runtime. This makes it possible to use different programming languages, even within the same application. See

Definitions on page 18

for further explanation of .NET terms.

NOTE!

It is presumed that you are already a .NET programmer. If not, you need to start by learning the programming language to be used. There are numerous books teaching C# and Visual

Basic.

Integration with Visual Studio

When Robot Application Builder is installed on your computer, it is integrated with Visual

Studio. You will notice when starting a new project, for example, that the project type /Smart

Device/FlexPendant is available in the New Project window. When using the wizard to create a FlexPendant project, common SDK references are added to the project and some code is auto generated.

The visual design support for the FlexPendant will be accessible from the Toolbox in VS and work the same way as the design support for an ordinary Windows application. As for a PC application you use the standard design support. As you will see, using RAB is quite intuitive for a developer used to Visual Studio programming.

NOTE!

The help module is not integrated with the Visual Studio Help function. Pressing F1 when pointing at code, for example, will open the Visual Studio Programmer’s Reference or the

.NET Framework Class Library for the specific language and topic. If your problem is RABrelated this will not help you.

TIP!

Depending on what kind of application you are working at, locate the FP SDK or PC SDK

Reference. You will find it by clicking Windows’ Start button, then pointing at Programs >

ABB Industrial IT > Robotics IT > Robot Application Builder 5.xx. Keep the reference file open while programming, as you will be needing it all the time.

30 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.5. Two development models - virtual and real

2.5. Two development models - virtual and real

About this section

When trying out a custom application, you can either use a virtual robot controller or a real robot system. This section provides information on how to use both development models.

Virtual robot technology

The virtual IRC5 of ABB’s RobotStudio allows the IRC5 controller software to execute on a

PC, and supports RAB application developers with a purely virtual environment to be used for development, test and debug.

When you start the virtual IRC5 in RobotStudio, a virtual robot cabinet along with a virtual

FlexPendant will appear on the PC screen.

As a real robot controller is normally not readily at hand for application development, virtual technology is very valuable.

Requirements for virtual environment

The following software components must be installed to develop, test and debug using the virtual environment:

•

ABB RobotStudio (including the virtual IRC5 and RobotStudio Online)

• ABB Robot Application Builder

•

Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or 2008

Controller option PC Interface or FlexPendant Interface may not be needed in the virtual environment.

Requirements for real environment

The following software components must be installed to develop, test and debug using a real robot controller:

• ABB RobotStudio (RobotStudio Online is needed to create the robot system)

•

ABB Robot Application Builder

• Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or 2008

•

Controller option PC Interface or FlexPendant Interface

• Network connection between PC and robot controller

For information about how to set up the network, see

How to set up your PC to robot communication on page 27

.

Virtual test and debug

Using the virtual environment a FlexPendant application executes on the Virtual FlexPendant as an assembly (dll). You start the application from the ABB menu of the Virtual FlexPendant just like you start it on the real FlexPendant.

A PC application, on the other hand, will run as an independent executable (exe). Using the virtual environment it targets the virtual IRC5 instead of a real robot controller.

Debugging is easy using the virtual IRC5 and Visual Studio. You attach the application process to Visual Studio, set a break point in the code and step through it as it executes. See

Debugging the virtual FlexPendant on page 282

for further information.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

31

2 Installation and development environment

2.5. Two development models - virtual and real

Continued

Real tests necessary

The virtual environment is a very convenient choice, especially for testing and debugging.

You should be aware, however, that the virtual FlexPendant is more forgiving than the real device. Using only the virtual FlexPendant, it is very easy to neglect the restraints on memory consumption imposed by the real device. Images, for example, can easily consume all the

FlexPendant memory available for custom applications!

This means that potential problems may be hard to detect until you test the application using a real robot system. It is almost as easy to debug code running on the real FlexPendant device.

See

Debugging the FlexPendant device on page 286

for detailed information.

You should also be aware that your application shares CPU, memory and application host with all other FlexPendant applications. This means that a custom application can impact the overall performance of the FlexPendant.

NOTE!

Before shipping a FlexPendant application, it has to be tested properly, using a real system.

Relying only on the virtual environment is far too risky. Also study the chapter

Robust

FlexPendant applications on page 181

carefully.

Porting the application from virtual to real IRC5

As for a PC SDK application, you will hardly notice any difference when using it with a real

IRC5 controller. The only real difference is that the communication between the application and the controller will now be done over a network, which may have an impact on performance.

A FlexPendant application, on the other hand, may run perfectly on the Virtual FlexPendant, but not work at all on the real device. There may be a lag in response time due to TCP/IP communication, but the main problem is limited resources on the device, both memory and processor power.

The FlexPendant SDK does not slow down performance. Therefore your application is

supposed to perform like any standard application of the FlexPendant. See

Performance on page 188

for some advice on how to speed up a slow FlexPendant application.

Deployment to customer

During development, deployment to the controller is done manually. When the development phase is over and the application needs to be deployed to the customer, this should be done differently.

For information about how this should be done, see

Packaging RAB applications on page

309

.

32 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

2 Installation and development environment

2.6. Conversion of VS 2005 projects to Visual Studio 2008

2.6. Conversion of VS 2005 projects to Visual Studio 2008

Overview

Converting an existing RAB Visual Studio 2005 project to Visual Studio 2008 is simple.

When you open a VS 2005 project in VS 2008, the Visual Studio Conversion Wizard will automatically appear. The procedure which converts the project to VS 2008 is easy to follow.

It consists of a few dialogs providing information about what will happen.

NOTE!

If the RAB project is an FP SDK projects, you need to manually edit the post-build event that builds the *gtpu.dll. Find Build Events in the Project Properties and adapt the path to

vcvarsall.bat to the new development environment.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 33

2 Installation and development environment

2.6. Conversion of VS 2005 projects to Visual Studio 2008

34 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3 Run-time environment

2.6. Conversion of VS 2005 projects to Visual Studio 2008

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 35

3 Run-time environment

3.1. Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant

3.1. Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant

About this chapter

There are two different platforms that a custom application may use: PC and FlexPendant.

Accordingly, RAB consists of two platform dependent SDKs the PC SDK and the

FlexPendant SDK.

This chapter provides an overview of the run-time environment of custom applications, including illustrations of the software architecture of the FlexPendant and PC SDK respectively.

How communication is carried out between the client and the robot controllers is explained, as well as how clients access controller resources.

Application configuration is detailed as well as deployment of a FlexPendant application to a robot controller. The life cycle of a FlexPendant application is also explained.

Most of the contents of this chapter is separated in PC and FlexPendant specific sections, as their respective run-time environments considerably differ.

Selecting the platform your application should use

Before you start developing a custom application, you must know which platform is best suited for meeting the needs of the customer. The platform choice depends on what tasks should be performed using the application, whether these tasks must be done at the robot cell and whether there is a PC at hand where the job needs to be done.

If the application should be used at the robot cell and there is no PC available, there evidently is no choice. It has to be a FlexPendant application. On the other hand, if the tasks can be done from a PC this is often a convenient platform, provided that the PC SDK offers the required functionality.

36

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.1. Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant

Continued

Local vs remote client

One difference between the two platforms is that a FlexPendant application is a local client, whereas a PC application is a remote client.

Remote clients do not have all the privileges of a local client. Both PC and FP applications can reset the program pointer and start RAPID execution, for example, but for a PC SDK application to do this there are certain restrictions. Mastership of the Rapid domain must be requested explicitly by the application programmer and the IRC5 controller has to be in automatic operating mode.

An advantage of a remote client, on the other hand, is the possibility to monitor and access several robot controllers from one location. As for large applications the PC platform is also less limited than the FlexPendant as regards memory resources and process power.

NOTE!

A minimum response time for a real controller should be expected to be in the order of 10-

100 milliseconds, meaning that hard real time demands cannot be met on any platform. See

Communication between PC and controller on page 46

and

Communication between

FlexPendant and controller on page 51

for further information.

Software architecture

The FlexPendant is an integral part of IRC5, yet a complete computer in itself. It has been developed with Microsoft's latest software technology for embedded systems, Windows CE and .NET Compact Framework, which is a subset of the full .NET Framework that the PC uses.

Simple illustrations of the software architecture of the two SDKs are shown below. As you can see the two run-time platforms, PC and FlexPendant, have a lot in common.

PC platform

3.1_1

Figure 1 - PC platform. Two PC SDK applications developed on top of the PC SDK. The PC

SDK CAPI is the public API offering controller functionality. A PC SDK application can control many robot controllers on the network. All communication with these is done via the internal RobApi.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

37

3 Run-time environment

3.1. Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant

Continued

FlexPendant platform

CAPI

3.1_2

Figure 2 - FlexPendant (SxTPU-2) platform. Two FlexPendant applications, one using VB and the other C#, developed on top of the FlexPendant SDK. The FlexPendant SDK CAPI is the public API offering controller functionality. All communication with the robot controller is done via the internal RobApi. The FlexPendant SDK provides ABB made UI controls suitable for the FlexPendant.

Both SDKs offer controller functionality through a public application interface called CAPI.

The interface can be seen as a specification of the controller services available.

Part of the controller services provided by the PC and FlexPendant SDK are the same. This means that part of the specification is also common (identical method signatures). The internal implementation of these controller services may differ, but for an external client, such as a RAB application, these methods are platform independent and work for both PC and

FlexPendant applications.

As illustrated below, however, only a small part of the PC and FlexPendant SDK is common.

Therefore, you cannot port a PC application to the FlexPendant platform or vice versa.

3.1_3

38

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.1. Two platforms - PC and FlexPendant

Continued

Figure 3 - Common CAPI methods can be used for both platforms. The other CAPI methods are platform dependent. As you can see the FlexPendant SDK is more extensive than the PC

SDK. This is mainly due to the fact that the FlexPendant SDK offers its own GUI controls.

In this figure these would be in the FlexPendant circle outside of the CAPI circle.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 39

3 Run-time environment

3.2.1. Licence verification - applies only to versions earlier than RAB 5.10

3.2 Running PC Applications

3.2.1. Licence verification - applies only to versions earlier than RAB 5.10

Overview

A PC SDK application runs as a .NET executable, started either by double clicking the exefile or by browsing to the program using the Windows Start menu.

Deployed PC applications do license verification during execution, checking that all application assemblies have been built on a PC with a valid PC SDK license key. If the key is missing some functions in the PC SDK will raise an exception during execution.

NOTE!

The license verification was removed in the 5.10 release. So the licx file detailed in the next section is no longer needed.

Licenses.licx

The license key should be placed in a “Licenses.licx” file, which should be added to your project as an embedded resource. For your convenience, such a file is included in the RAB installation at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application

Builder\PC SDK. The key for the PC SDK in VS 2005 is:

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Licenses.PCSdk, ABB.Robotics.Controllers

TIP!

The License Compiler (Lc.exe) is a .Net Framework tool. It generates a .license file from a

.licx file. Search in MSDN (licx , lc.exe) if you want more detailed information.

40 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.2.2. Mastership

3.2.2. Mastership

Controlling controller resources

Controller resources must be controlled by a single client at a time. Several people can be logged on to the controller, but only one person at a time can run commands or change RAPID data. This is for security reasons as well as for protecting data from being accidentally overwritten.

When logged on to a controller you can have either read-only access or write access. Read only is the default access right. To get write access the client needs to request mastership of the controller resource it wants to manipulate.

NOTE!

In addition to the access right system, there is the User Authorization System, which restricts

what each user is allowed to do with the robot. See

User Authorization System on page 70

for further information.

Manual and automatic mode

When the controller is in manual mode, the FlexPendant has priority to write access, and mastership will not be given to a remote client unless an operator explicitly allows this via the FlexPendant. At any time, the operator can press Revoke on the FlexPendant to get the write access back.

In automatic mode, the client who first requests write access will get it. If a remote client has taken mastership of a domain other remote clients will not be allowed write access, but will get an exception if they try. For the operator there is no way to revoke mastership to the

FlexPendant, but to switch the operating mode of the controller to manual.

As for FlexPendant SDK applications, requesting and releasing mastership is handled internally by the FlexPendant SDK, and the application programmer does not need to worry about it.

As for a remote client, such as a PC SDK application, however, it has to be carefully implemented by the application programmer.

PC SDK mastership domains

The PC SDK domains which require mastership are:

•

Rapid

• Configuration

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

41

3 Run-time environment

3.2.2. Mastership

Continued

For code examples see

Start program execution on page 208

in the PC SDK section.

NOTE!

Operations that require mastership are more resource demanding. Mastership should therefore be released as soon as an operation is completed.

Remote privilege in manual mode

Most of the time, it is not very convenient to have a PC SDK application perform operations that require mastership when the controller is in manual mode. Starting program execution for example is not even possible.

In manual mode when a remote client, e.g. RobotStudio or a PC SDK application, requests mastership a dialog box will appear on the FlexPendant. It enables the operator to grant mastership to the requesting client.

If mastership is granted, the remote application has the privilege to access robot controller resources. Meanwhile, the FlexPendant is locked and cannot be used until the remote application releases mastership or mastership is lost for any of the reasons mentioned in

Losing mastership on page 42

.

Losing mastership

Remote clients have to be prepared that mastership may be lost without a warning for a number of reasons. Among these are:

• change from automatic to manual mode

• controller restart

• lost communication

• in manual mode forced revocation of mastership by another client with higher priority

- for example the FlexPendant

If mastership is lost, it has to be taken back explicitly by the client. The controller does not store the information.

NOTE!

The FlexPendant may also lose mastership without any warning. This may happen in automatic mode, when a RobotStudio user or a PC SDK application asks for write access to the controller, for example. The status bar of the FlexPendant will then indicate “Remote

Access in Auto”.

42 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.2.3. PC application configuration

3.2.3. PC application configuration

Application configuration file

All .NET Winform applications are designed to read configuration from an App.config file in the application directory. It is not mandatory to use such a file in a PC SDK application, but it is sometimes a handy way to add application flexibility.

For your convenience an App.config file that you can use is included in the RAB installation.

The default values, which the PC SDK uses if there is no configuration file to read, are entered in the file. To modify application behavior you thus need to change the values of the attributes of this file.

NOTE!

Even if you use the App.config file to specify which controllers to work with you must still use the netscan functionality to be able to establish a connection from your PC application.

See

Discovery domain on page 210

for further information.

Add App.config to the project

Start by copying the App.config file at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics

IT\Robot Application Builder 5.xx\PC SDK to the directory of your .csproj file. Then add the file to the project by right-clicking the project icon, pointing to Add and selecting Existing

Item.

NOTE!

The Copy Local property of the PC SDK references used by your application must be set to true to make use of the App.config file. (In the Solution Explorer in Visual Studio, right-click the reference and select Properties.)

Section tag

The

<section>

tag in the

<configSection>

part of the App.config should specify that there is a capi section in the file. It should also specify which type is to be used as the configuration container object as well as the assembly that this type belongs to:

<section name="capi" type="ABB.Robotics.Controllers.ConfigurationHandler,

ABB.Robotics.Controllers"/>

Capi section

The PC SDK application specific configuration data should be added to the

<capi>

section.

<capi>

...

</capi>

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

43

3 Run-time environment

3.2.3. PC application configuration

Continued

The following tags are implemented in the PC SDK:

<defaultSystem>

If there is a controller (robot system) in the network that you connect to often, you may want to use the

<defaultSystem>

tag. It has an id

attribute containing a string embraced by curly brackets. It is the system’s globally unique identifier (GUID), which can be find in the

system.guid file in the INTERNAL folder of the robot system.

<defaultSystem id="{469F56DF-938E-4B06-B036-AABBB3E61F83}" />

Using this mechanism enables you to use the default constructor to create a

Controller object for the specified controller:

VB:

Dim aController As Controller = New Controller()

<remoteControllers>

It is possible to add controllers outside the local network when scanning for available controllers. One way of doing that is to add the IP address of these controllers in the

<remoteControllers>

tag:

<remoteControllers><controller id="192.168.0.9" />

<controller id="192.168.0.19" />

</remoteControllers>

<discovery.networkscanner>

You can configure how long (in ms) a scan operation will last, and increase the value if netscanning fails. The default value is 200, but if you have a slow PC longer time might be needed.

<discovery.networkscanner delay="400" />

<defaultUser>

C#:

Controller aController = new Controller();

The

<defaultUser>

tag holds information about user name, password and an optional application name for the default user. It is used by the

UserInfo

class to log on to a controller. If an application name is not supplied, the process name is used.

<defaultUser name="user name" password="password" application="application"/>

<rmmp>

When mastership is requested in manual mode by a remote client such as RobotStudio or a

PC SDK application, a dialog is launched on the FlexPendant asking the operator to confirm that mastership should be passed from the FlexPendant to a remote client. As long as there is no confirmation on the FlexPendant the PC SDK application is not given mastership. The time-out parameter is the time in seconds that the PC SDK application will wait for someone to confirm remote access in the FlexPendant dialog. The cycle parameter is the time in ms between poll calls from the PC SDK to check whether mastership has been granted.

<rmmp cycle="550" timeout="65" />

44

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.2.3. PC application configuration

Continued

<controllerCall>

<eventStrategy>

You can add a time-out in ms and a multiplicand for slow calls to the controller. The time-out parameter is the maximum time a call through the Controller API will be permitted. If no answer is returned within the time specified, an exception is thrown. A slow call is a call that takes longer than usual, usually operations which require a UAS grant:

<controllerCall timeout="27000" slow="2.1" />

The default way to handle events from the controller is to use asynchronous delegates

(

AsyncDelegate

), applying the

Invoke

method to synchronize events and GUI.

By using an

<eventStrategy>

tag, you can choose to use a windows postback delegate instead. To make this work you must also implement a subscription to the event from a windows form, or else the event handler will not receive the event:

<eventStrategy name="WindowDelegate" />

NOTE!

Using this strategy for event handling may affect the performance of your application.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 45

3 Run-time environment

3.2.4. Communication between PC and controller

3.2.4. Communication between PC and controller

COM technique

The PC SDK uses an internal Controller API based on COM technique to communicate with

the controller. This API uses sockets and the local TCP/IP stack (see

Definitions on page 18

) towards both real and virtual controllers.

NOTE!

You should be aware that the .NET garbage collector does not collect COM objects, but these

need to be disposed of explicitly by the application programmer. See

Memory management in PC applications on page 213

for further information.

Resource identification

All controller resources, both real and virtual, are described using object based hierarchy.

Each resource is uniquely identified, including information about which controller owns the resource by use of the unique system id or IP address of the controller.

The controller is the top object of the hierarchy:

TIP!

"/<Controller>/<Domain>/<SubDomain1>/<SubDomain2>/etc"

Error messages including such a path indicate where to look for the problem.

Hard real-time demands

You should be aware that the PC CAPI cannot meet hard real-time demands. This is for several reasons:

• Part of the API executes on a non-real-time operating system.

•

Communication is performed with TCP/IP over a network

• The controller sometimes has tasks to perform that have a higher right of priority.

NOTE!

A minimum response time for real controllers should be expected to be in the order of 10-100 milliseconds.

46 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.1. Components, assemblies and dlls

3.3 Running FlexPendant Applications

3.3.1. Components, assemblies and dlls

Building blocks

The .NET Framework is a library of components and supporting classes and structures, designed to make component development easy and robust. Components are packaged in assemblies, also called dlls.

Assemblies are the building blocks of .NET applications. An assembly is a reusable collection of types and resources, which are built to work together and form a logical unit of functionality. The simplest assembly is a single executable.

One or several assemblies

A FlexPendant project compiles to a dll, which cannot run as an independent application, but needs to be started by the Teach Pendant Application Framework (TAF), the application manager of the FlexPendant. (See

Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle on page

52

for further information about how this works.)

In a normal case, a custom application for the FlexPendant is developed as a single component, but it is also possible to separate functionality into several components. This way the application will consist of several dlls. The reason for doing so might be one of the following:

•

The amount of code is substantial. A modular design with small and well tested building blocks put together is one way of handling complexity.

• Different developers are working on the same custom application. For reasons of efficiency, they can split the functionality between them and work on one component each.

NOTE!

It is possible to use different programming languages for different components.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 47

3 Run-time environment

3.3.2. Deployment of FlexPendant application to a robot system

3.3.2. Deployment of FlexPendant application to a robot system

Proxy assembly

When you compile a FlexPendant SDK application an additional assembly named *gtpu.dll is automatically created. This is done by a tool, the ABB Compliance Tool, which verifies that the application complies to the FlexPendant requirements. This proxy dll is necessary to run the application on the FlexPendant.

To test the application on a real FlexPendant both assemblies must be downloaded to the

SYSTEM or HOME directory of the robot controller. After this the FlexPendant should be restarted. At startup it loads the application assemblies from the controller.

TIP!

An advantage of deploying the dlls to the HOME directory is that they will be included in a system backup.

Download to real controller

To download your application assemblies to the controller you can use the Online function

File Transfer of RobotStudio.

Another way of downloading the application to the robot controller is using the ABB

Compliance Tool.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Verify that the following requirements are met before starting the procedure:

• A network connection between the PC and the controller has to be configured, either using the controller LAN port or the controller service port. For further information see

How to set up your PC to robot communication on page 27

.

• The RobotWare option FlexPendant Interface is required to run the application on a real system. Without the option you will not see the application in the ABB menu.

Open Windows Explorer.

Start abbct.exe at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot

Application Builder 5.xx\FlexPendant SDK.

48

4

4.3.2_1

Click Browse and locate your Visual Studio project and the application assembly in the \bin\debug (or \bin\release) sub-folder.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.2. Deployment of FlexPendant application to a robot system

Continued

Step

5

6

Action

Check the Deploy box, enter the IP Address of the robot controller and press

Execute. Deployment is done to the current system of the controller.

Note!

If the application consists of several assemblies you need to repeat the procedure for all of these.

Restart the FlexPendant. See

Restart the FlexPendant on page 49

for information

about different ways to do this.

Using the command window

The ABB Compliance Tool can be used via the command window instead of the graphical interface. To do so you write:abbct.exe /deploy="192.168.8.192"

<PATH>\TpsViewHelloWorld.dll <PATH>\TpsViewHelloWorld.gtpu.dll.

It is also possible to perform build and deployment in one step. To do this the deploy argument should come last: abbct.exe <PATH>\TpsViewHelloWorld.dll /deploy="192.168.8.192"

Both the application and proxy assembly are deployed to the controller after the build.

FTP deployment

You can also use an FTP client to transfer files from your PC to the robot controller.

To use FTP you need:

• FTP client program

•

Configured connection to the controller

• RobotWare option FTP Client

•

Name and password

Step

1

Action

Transfer resources (e.g. icons) and the application and proxy assemblies to the

HOME or SYSTEM directory of the current system of the controller.

Restart the FlexPendant. See the next section for information on how to do so.

2

NOTE!

For deployment to a customer when the application is ready see

Deployment of a FlexPendant

SDK application on page 311

.

Restart the FlexPendant

If you want to restart the FlexPendant device without restarting the controller, choose one of these alternatives:

Alternative Action

1

2

Write the command fpcmd "-restart"

in the controller console window on your PC.

Perform the following sequence while holding the FlexPendant joystick:

Move the joystick three times to the right, once to the left and once down.

Confirm your wish to reset the FlexPendant in the dialog that will appear.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

49

3 Run-time environment

3.3.2. Deployment of FlexPendant application to a robot system

Continued

Alternative Action

3 Unplug and plug the FlexPendant (power on/ power off).

Note! This activates emergency stop.

Deploy application to virtual IRC5

Follow these steps to deploy an application to the virtual FlexPendant:

Step Action

1

2

Copy application and proxy assemblies and images to the HOME directory of the system you want to use on your PC.

Note! Close the virtual FlexPendant first if you are replacing assemblies.

Restart the virtual FlexPendant.

TIP!

If you have problems running your application, try to put all files (dlls, gif files etc.) in the vcbin directory of the robotware your system uses. This setup is as close to the real system setup as you can get.

50 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.3. Communication between FlexPendant and controller

3.3.3. Communication between FlexPendant and controller

COM technique

The FlexPendant SDK uses an internal Controller API based on COM technique to communicate with the controller. This API uses sockets and TCP/IP (see

About terms and acronyms on page 18

) towards both real and virtual controllers.

Calls from the FlexPendant SDK to the controller are synchronous, i.e. are done immediately through the COM servers. This increases execution speed and causes less overhead, which is important on a resource limited device.

Resource identification

All controller resources, both real and virtual, are described using object based hierarchy.

Each resource is uniquely identified, including information about which controller owns the resource by use of the unique system id or IP address of the controller.

The controller is the top object of the hierarchy:

TIP!

"/<Controller>/<Domain>/<SubDomain1>/<SubDomain2>/etc"

Error messages including such a path indicate where to look for the problem.

Hard real-time demands

The FlexPendant SDK cannot meet hard real-time demands. This is for several reasons:

•

Part of the API executes on a non-real-time operating system.

• The controller sometimes has tasks to perform that have a higher right of priority.

NOTE!

The FlexPendant SDK does not affect performance in a negative way. You should expect your custom application to perform like any other application on the ABB menu.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 51

3 Run-time environment

3.3.4. Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle

3.3.4. Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle

Overview

Understanding the FlexPendant application life cycle improves your ability to design and debug the application.

TAF - Application host framework

The Teach Pendant Application Framework (TAF) is the application service provider that runs on the FlexPendant. It targets .NET CF and is implemented in C#. All applications using the FlexPendant SDK must run as TAF clients, as TAF contains services for hosting controls and for managing applications.

TAF uses a customized configuration file to create the appearance and behavior of the hosted application. It also defines a set of rules that have to be followed.

Starting a custom application

When the FlexPendant starts up TAF is already in the flash memory. Applications that will execute in the TAF container are now loaded from the controller.

If the RAB application is to be started manually by the end-user the application icon and text are placed in the ABB Menu. The other alternative is to have it started automatically by TAF at FlexPendant startup. See

FlexPendant TpsView attribute on page 54

to learn how this is configured.

Application life cycle

TAF handles the life cycle of a custom application, starting by calling the constructor of its

TpsView class. After this, the

Install

method and then the

Activate

method in the same class execute.

During its lifetime, the application switches between the active and the passive state. Each time, either

Activate

or

Deactivate

is executed. In its active state the application is visible in the client view, in the passive state another application may have been opened or the user may have opened another application via the FlexPendant task bar.

When the application is closed via the close button, first the

Deactivate

method runs and then

Uninstall

. After this the

Dispose

method of the TpsView class is called. Then the application instance is disposed of by TAF. See

ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation on page 58

for further information about how you can implement these methods.

52

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Illustration

3 Run-time environment

3.3.4. Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle

Continued

4.3.3_1

The figure illustrates the life cycle of a FlexPendant application.

Limited resources

As the FlexPendant is a device with very limited resources compared to a PC, you should learn and use the mechanisms implemented to assist you in writing efficient code.

Both process power and memory resources are limited compared to the virtual environment on the desktop. An application may run very well on the virtual FlexPendant, but encounter serious problems in the real environment because of these limitations. See

Technical overview of the FlexPendant device on page 182

for further information.

NOTE!

You are strongly recommended to read

Robust FlexPendant applications on page 181

in this manual before starting coding. Always keep the limitations of the device in mind when you develop custom FlexPendant applications.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 53

3 Run-time environment

3.3.5. FlexPendant TpsView attribute

3.3.5. FlexPendant TpsView attribute

Overview

A custom FlexPendant application must implement the assembly attribute

TpsView

. It is used to determine the visual appearance of the application in the ABB menu, for example.

The

TpsView

attribute is auto generated and located before the namespace definition in the application view class, i.e. the class that displays the first view of a FlexPendant SDK application.

In this section all parameters of the

TpsView

attribute will be detailed.

Project wizard settings

The

TpsView

attribute is auto generated according to your settings in the FlexPendant SDK

Project Wizard in Visual Studio:

54

6.2.2_1

In C# the settings of the figure will render this code:

[assembly: TpsView("MyApplicationName", "tpu-Operator32.gif",

"tpu-Operator16.gif", "TpsViewHelloWorld.dll",

"TpsViewHelloWorld.TpsViewHelloWorld",

StartPanelLocation.Left, TpsViewType.Static, StartupType =

TpsViewStartupTypes.Manual)]

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.5. FlexPendant TpsView attribute

Continued

NOTE!

You can edit your settings directly in the auto generated code if you want to.

Visual appearance

In run-time the most obvious result of this code is the way the custom application is presented in the ABB menu. In this example the first

TpsView

parameter has been changed from

“MyApplicationName” to “Hello World”.

4.3.4_1

Application name

The first parameter of TpsView is the application name as it should appear in the ABB menu and on the task bar. The example uses

“HelloWorld”

as the application name.

Application icon

The second parameter is the file to be used as the application icon in the ABB menu. Usually a customized icon is used for the application.The example uses the default icon: “ tpu-

Operator32.gif"

.

TaskBar icon

The third parameter is the file to be used as the application task bar icon. The example uses the default icon

"tpu-Operator16.gif"

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

55

3 Run-time environment

3.3.5. FlexPendant TpsView attribute

Continued

Application assembly

The fourth parameter is the assembly name. If you change the name of the application assembly you also need to change this parameter to reflect that change. In the example, the assembly name is

"TpsViewHelloWorld.dll"

.

NOTE!

The assembly name must start with “TpsView” for TAF to identify it as an application to be loaded. If you forget this an error will be generated by the ABB verification tool when you try to build the project.

Class name

The fifth parameter specifies the fully qualified class name of the initial view of your application, which you chose in the New Project dialog box. In the example, the fully qualified class name is

"TpsViewHelloWorld.TpsViewHelloWorld"

.

Application location

The sixth parameter determines the location of the application icon and text in the ABB menu.

In the example these are displayed in the left column: startPanelLocation.Left

.

Parameter value

StartPanelLocation.Left

StartPanelLocation.Right

StartPanelLocation.None

Result

application visible to the left in the ABB menu.

application visible to the right in the ABB menu.

application is not visible at all in the ABB menu.

NOTE!

StartPanelLocation.None

was introduced in 5.11.01. Applications that use it can therefore NOT be run on RobotWare releases older than 5.11.01.

Application type

As you can tell from the two Hello World icons visible in the task bar, two instances of the

Hello World application have been started. To enable this the seventh parameter is changed to :

TpsViewType.Dynamic

. Possible view type values are shown in the table:

Parameter value

TpsViewType.Dynamic

TpsViewType.Static

TpsViewType.Invisible

Result

The user can start multiple instances of the application.

The user can only start one instance of the application.

A background application with no GUI and no icon on the task bar. Can be started automatically or manually. Only one instance is possible.

56

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.5. FlexPendant TpsView attribute

Continued

NOTE!

Unless there is special need for it, you should allow the user to start only one instance of the application:

TpsViewType.Static

. The reason is that working with several instances takes up valuable memory resources.

Startup type

The eighth parameter determines how the application is started. In the example the startup type is

TpsViewStartupTypes.Manual

and the application is started from the ABB menu.

Using the manual startup type it is also possible to have the application started by RAPID or at operating mode change to auto for example. See

System features supporting the use of customized screens on page 78

for information about how to do this.

If TpsViewStartupTypes.Automatic is chosen, the application is started automatically by TAF whenever the FlexPendant is restarted or a new user logs on.

Related information

For information about the Style setting of the Project Wizard, see

Container style on page

97

.

To find the FlexPendant SDK Project Wizard in Visual Studio, see

Setting up a new project on page 80

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 57

3 Run-time environment

3.3.6. ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation

3.3.6. ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation

ITpsViewSetup

An application that TAF needs to initialize must have a default (empty) constructor and must implement the interface

ITpsViewSetup

, which specifies the two methods

Install

and

Uninstall

.

Install and Uninstall

Install

is called when the application is created in TAF. The parameters are used by TAF and should not be modified. It is recommended to add code for further initiations and allocation of system resources in this method, e.g. load assemblies, open communication channels, etc.

When the user closes the application

Uninstall

is called. This happens right before the application is deleted. It is recommended to add code for disposal of system resources in this method, e.g. unload assemblies, close sockets, etc.

ITpsViewActivation

All custom applications should implement the

ITpsViewActivation

interface, which specifies the two methods

Activate

and

Deactivate

. These are used by TAF to notify applications when they get focus and when they lose it.

Activate and Deactivate

Activate

is run every time the application gets focus. This happens at initialization, after the

ITpsViewSetup.Instal

l method has been run, and when the user presses the application icon in the task bar.

Deactivate

, accordingly, is run every time the application loses focus. This happens when the user closes the application, before the

ITpsViewSetup.Uninstall method has been run, and when the user presses another application icon in the task bar.

NOTE!

It is recommended to activate and deactivate timers in these methods. This way timers will not run when other applications are in focus, thus saving processor power. For the same reason, any subscription to controller events should be disabled in

Deactivate

and enabled again in

Activate

. Note that current values should be read before enabling the subscription.

Simple code examples

This table shows the basic things that the

ITpsView

methods are used for in a custom application:

Method Usage

Install

Create the

Controller

object:

VB:

AController = New Controller

C#: aController = new Controller();

58

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.3.6. ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation

Continued

Method Usage

Activate

Deactivate

Remove subscription to controller event:

VB:

RemoveHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf

UpdateU

I

C#:

AController.OperatingModeChanged -= new

OperatingModeChangedEventHandler(UpdateUI);

Uninstall

Add subscription to controller event:

VB:

AddHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf

UpdateUI

C#:

AController.OperatingModeChanged += new

OperatingModeChangedEventHandler(UpdateUI);

Remove the controller object:

VB:

If Not AController Is Nothing Then

AController.Dispose()

AController = Nothing

End If

C#: i f (aController != null)

{

aController.Dispose();

aController = null;

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 59

3 Run-time environment

3.4. Release upgrades and compatibility

3.4. Release upgrades and compatibility

About this section

Why did RAB 5.08 enforce an upgrade to Visual Studio 2005?

Will a RAB application still work if the customer upgrades the robot system with the latest

RobotWare release?

What happens if you develop a RAB application using the 5.11 release and the customer system uses RobotWare 5.10?

Such questions are dealt with in this section.

Platform upgrades

The Microsoft platform that the FlexPendant uses still goes through major improvements, which ABB needs to take advantage of. This may concern performance or other issues.

In RAB 5.08 for example, Visual Studio 2003 was no longer supported. It may seem that this was uncalled-for, but there are always reasons why such changes occur.

The Visual Design support for the FlexPendant SDK, had long been on the wish list. When

Microsoft provided the support necessary to meet this need, with CF 2.0, an upgrade of the

FlexPendant software platform was made. The development of the design support for

FlexPendant controls for RAB 5.08 made a transition to Visual Studio 2005 necessary.

NOTE!

RAB 5.10 supports Visual Studio 2005. RAB 5.11 supports VS 2005 and VS 2008.

Matching RAB and RobotWare release

You should be aware that the RAB SDKs are developed and tested for a specific RobotWare release. The general rule is therefore that you develop an application for a certain release.

Compatibility between revisions is however guaranteed (e.g. RW 5.11.01 will be compatible with RAB 5.11).

RobotWare upgrades

At some time during the lifetime of your application, a robot system that your application targets may be upgraded with a later RobotWare version.

As for a FP SDK application this means that the runtime will change, i.e. the FP SDK assemblies located in RobotWare will be different from the ones that were used when the application was developed. Generally, the only way to be sure that the existing application will work with a newer RobotWare version is to compile the source code with the FP SDK version that matches the intended RobotWare version. Normally compilation succeeds without any code changes, as FP SDK 5.09 - 5.11 are fully compatible.

The PC SDK it is normally compatible with a newer RobotWare release. The PC that hosts the PC SDK application at the customer, however, still needs an upgrade of the Robot

Communication Runtime, so that it matches the new robotware release. See

ABB Industrial

Robot Communication Runtime.msi on page 310

If you decide to upgrade the PC SDK application, you must also remember to upgrade the runtime environment of the customer’s

PC. See

Deployment of a PC SDK application on page 309

for details.

60

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

3 Run-time environment

3.4. Release upgrades and compatibility

Continued

NOTE!

You find all the details about compatibility between different RAB versions in the Release

Notes.

TIP!

When compiling your project notice any warnings of obsolete methods, as these will probably be removed in the next RAB release.

Prepared for change

To sum up, it is important to keep source code safe and available for maintenance.

TIP!

Ildasm is a Microsoft tool, which comes with the installation of Visual Studio, that you may find useful. It enables you to open the manifest of a specified assembly and quickly find out about dependencies for example.

Find out more about it at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa309387(VS.71).aspx

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 61

3 Run-time environment

3.4. Release upgrades and compatibility

62 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4 Developing RAB applications

3.4. Release upgrades and compatibility

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 63

4 Developing RAB applications

4.1. Introduction

4.1. Introduction

About this chapter

This chapter deals with analysis, design and implementation of RAB applications.

It also discusses some specific programming issues that are important for both PC and

FlexPendant SDK users:

• thread conflicts and how to avoid them

• controller events and event handling

• errors and exception handling

• the User Authorization System

The chapter does not include hands-on information on how to set up your first project or detailed information on how to use the PC and FlexPendant SDK class libraries, as these topics are covered in dedicated chapters.

Basic approach

In most aspects, using the PC or FP SDK for application development presents no major difference compared to ordinary .NET development. The .NET class libraries are used for everything that is not robot specific. In addition, you use the public Controller API of the

SDKs.

64

NOTE!

When using the .Net class libraries for FlexPendant development, see Version Information to be sure that the class or method is supported on .NET Compact Framework 2.0, which runs on the FlexPendant.

Take this good advice if you are going to program your first RAB application

Step Action

1. Before you start

Learn the basics about RAB programming by reading all relevant sections of this manual. Feel reassured that this is a timesaving activity and do not rush into coding.

If you are going to develop an application for the FlexPendant, a device with limited

resources compared to a PC, studying the chapter

Robust FlexPendant applications on page 181

is crucial.

2. During development

Frequently test application functionality.

Do not wait too long before you test a FlexPendant application on a real FlexPendant device.

3. After development

If you develop a FlexPendant application, set up a long term test before use in production. If not, you risk that the FlexPendant slowly runs completely out of memory and crashes due to your application.

Verify application behavior, performance and memory consumption. Use the services offered by the ABB.Robotics.Diagnostics namespace, e.g. memory

tracking. See

FlexPendant - Debugging and troubleshooting on page 279

for further information.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.2. Analysis and design

4.2. Analysis and design

About this section

The purpose of Robot Application Builder is to provide operator interfaces that fulfill specific customer needs. This section focusses on the development phases preceding the actual coding: analysis and design.

Object oriented software development

.NET is entirely object-oriented. Platform services are divided into different namespaces such as

System.Collections, System.Data

,

System.IO, System.Security and so on.

Each namespace contains a set of related classes that allow access to platform services.RAB, too, is completely object oriented. Its class libraries are organized in different namespaces such as

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain,

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.MotionDomain

etc.

Some experience in object orientation is necessary to start developing custom applications. It is presumed that you feel comfortable with concepts such as objects, classes, methods, inheritance, encapsulation etc.

Object oriented Analysis and Design

Object Oriented Analysis and Design, OOAD, is a popular topic in computer science literature, where the importance of doing a thorough analysis and design before starting coding is commonly accepted. A well designed OO application has a true representation in the real world. Classes have well defined areas of responsibility and collaborate in an efficient way to achieve what is required.

Analysis based on communication and use cases

The main idea of Robot Application Builder is, as has already been pointed out, that custom operator interfaces can be developed close to end-users, taking their specific needs in consideration. It therefore goes without saying that analysis is crucial.

The result of the object-oriented analysis is a description of what we want to build, often expressed as a conceptual model. Any other documentation that is needed to describe what we want to build, for example pictures of the User Interface, is also part of analysis.

The most important aspect for RAB development is communication with end-users.

Activities which support a shared view of what should be developed are strongly recommended. Such activities may include:

• creating and discussing use cases together

• coding or drawing prototypes and get end-user feedback

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

65

4 Developing RAB applications

4.2. Analysis and design

Continued

In short, involving end-users from the early stages and keeping them involved throughout the development project is the best strategy.

NOTE!

Customer satisfaction is what has driven the development of Robot Application Builder. Do make sure that you have really understood what the end-users of your application need.

Design is about managing complexity

The result of the object-oriented design details how the system can be built, using objects.

Abstraction is used to break complex problems into manageable chunks. It makes it possible to comprehend the problem as a whole or to study parts of it at lower levels of abstraction.

It takes years to become a skilled object oriented designer. Design theory must be transformed into practical experience and iterated over and over again.

The goal is to produce high quality code, which is cost-efficient and easy to maintain. This is achieved, for example, when adding new functionality will involve minimal changes to existing code and most changes will be handled as new methods and new classes.

Do you need to do design?

There is a huge difference in complexity when creating software such as .NET framework, for example, and a custom operator view for IRC5. Obviously, the more complex a system the more careful design is needed. Accordingly, the larger and more complex a custom application needs to be, the more likely you are to spend time on design.

This table presents some considerations before deciding how well you need to design your application before starting coding:

Consideration Advice

How much code is it going to be?

If it is going to be a very simple application with just one view and a few buttons there is no need even to split the code between different classes and files.

If there will be a substantial amount of code and there might be further extensions later on, spending time on design becomes more relevant.

Will different developers work on different classes/ components? Will you maintain the code yourself, or may it be done by others?

If yes, spending time om design becomes more relevant.

Is the real time aspect of the application important?

If yes, coding efficiently is important. This will much more easily be achieved if you spend some time on design.

Note! You are also recommended to read through the chapter

Robust FlexPendant applications on page 181

before starting

coding.

As complex or as easy as you wish

A simple custom application can be created in a day or two using RAB. A large custom application with a number of different views, offering advanced robot system functionality, however, may take months to develop and will require considerable programming skill.The recommendation is to start developing a simple application, which you execute on the target platform, before moving on to advanced RAB programming.

66 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.3. Controller events and threads

4.3. Controller events and threads

Overview

A controller event is a message from the controller that something has happened. Events can be caught and acted upon by RAB applications.

Controller events use their own threads. This means that user interface threads and controller event threads can get into conflict. This section gives information on how to prevent this.

Controller events

RAB applications can subscribe to a number of controller events. These are all described in the reference documentation for the SDKs.

The table shows some events that exist both in the PC and FlexPendant SDK.

The event...

occurs when...

StateChanged

OperatingModeChanged

ExecutionStatusChanged

Changed

MessageWritten

ValueChanged the controller state has changed.

the controller operating mode has changed.

the controller execution status has changed.

the value or the state of the I/O signal has changed.

the EventLog has a new message the value of a RAPID data has changed.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

67

4 Developing RAB applications

4.3. Controller events and threads

Continued

NOTE!

There is no guarantee you will get an initial event when setting up/activating a controller event. You need to read the initial state from the controller.

GUI and controller event threads in conflict

You should be aware that controller events use their own threads both on the FlexPendant and

PC platform. If a GUI thread and a controller event thread get into conflict, deadlocks or overwritten data may occur. This may happen when a controller event is succeeded by an update of the user interface, which is indeed a very common scenario.

You then need to take action in your code to control that the user interface update is executed by the GUI thread and not by the controller event thread. This is done by enforcing a thread switch using the

Invoke

or

BeginInvoke

method. See

Invoke method on page 68

for

information on how this is done along with code examples.

On the other hand, if the controller event should NOT cause any update of the user interface, you should not take any special action. Using

Invoke

/

BeginInvoke

is performance demanding and should not be used more than necessary.

NOTE!

Thread conflicts often cause hangings. The FlexPendant touch screen or the PC application

UI then stops responding and the application has to be restarted.

Examine what exception has been thrown when you encounter such a situation. The exceptions

System.NotSupportedException

(FlexPendant platform) and

System.InvalidOperationException

(PC platform) indicate thread conflicts. See the next section for information on how to use

Invoke

to solve the problem.

Invoke method

All PC application windows and FlexPendant views must inherit

Control

/

TpsControl

, which implement

Invoke

and

BeginInvoke

. These methods execute the specified delegate/ event handler on the thread that owns the control's underlying window handle, thus enforcing a switch from a worker thread to the GUI thread. This is precisely what is needed when a controller event needs to be communicated to the end user of the system.

Invoke

should be called inside the event handler taking care of the controller event. Notice that you have to create a new object array for the sender and argument objects:

VB:

Me.Invoke(New EventHandler(AddressOf UpdateUI), New Object()

{sender, e})

C#: this.Invoke(new EventHandler(UpdateUI), new Object[] {sender, e});

68

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.3. Controller events and threads

Continued

Also notice that if you use

EventHandler

in the

Invoke

method and not the specific delegate class, e.g.

DataValueChangedEventHandler

, you need to typecast the argument in the delegate which updates the user interface. How this is done is shown by the example below:

VB:

Private Sub UpdateUI(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs)

Dim Args As ExecutionStatusChangedEventArgs

Args = DirectCast(e, ExecutionStatusChangedEventArgs)

Me.Label1.Text = e.NewStatus.ToString()

End Sub

C#: private void UpdateUI(object sender, System.EventArgs e)

{

ExecutionStatusChangedEventArgs args; args = (ExecutionStatusChangedEventArgs) e; this.label1.Text = e.NewStatus.ToString();

}

NOTE!

The difference between

Invoke

and

BeginInvoke

is that the former makes a synchronous call and will hang until the GUI operation is completed, whereas

BeginInvoke

executes the specified event handler asynchronously. Which method you want to use depends on the logics of your program. The recommendation is to choose

BeginInvoke

whenever possible.

NOTE!

If your code tries to access a GUI control from a background thread the .NET common language runtime will throw a

System.NotSupportedException

(FlexPendant platform) or a

System.InvalidOperationException

(PC platform).

TIP!

If you are using the FlexPendant SDK there is further information about threads in

Thread affinity on page 196

and

Invoke on page 196

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 69

4 Developing RAB applications

4.4. User Authorization System

4.4. User Authorization System

Overview

In the robot controller there is a system controlling user access: the User Authorization

System (UAS). If this feature is used each user needs a user name and a password to log on to a robot controller via the FlexPendant or RobotStudio. If the controller connection for any reason is lost, the user has to log on again.

The controller holds information on which operations different users are allowed to perform.

The UAS configuration is done in Robot Studio.

TIP!

To learn more about UAS use the help function in Robot Studio.

Accessing UAS from custom applications

Before sensitive controller operations are performed, a FlexPendant SDK application should check that the user currently logged on has the corresponding UAS rights.

Accessing UAS is done by using the property

AuthorizationSystem

on the controller object:

VB:

Dim UAS As UserAuthorizationSystem =

Me.AController.AuthorizationSystem

C#:

UserAuthorizationSystem uas = this.aController.AuthorizationSystem;

Grants and Groups

UAS rights are called Grants. The specific user belongs to one of several defined Groups, where each group has a number of specified grants.

To ensure that the user has the necessary grant to perform an operation, you use the

CheckDemandGrant

method on the

AuthorizationSystem

object. The grant to check is passed as an argument:

VB:

C#:

If UAS.CheckDemandGrant(Grant.ModifyRapidProgram) Then

ATask.LoadModuleFromFile(ALocalFile, RapidLoadMode.Replace)

End If if (uas.CheckDemandGrant(Grant.ModifyRapidProgram)) { aTask.LoadModuleFromFile(localFile, RapidLoadMode.Replace);

}

70

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.4. User Authorization System

Continued

NOTE!

The RAB application cannot override the UAS configuration. This means that the system will in the end prevent the user from performing an action that is not allowed.

MessageBox feedback

If a UAS grant is missing the user should get information about it. This can be done in a message as shown in this example: msg = "You are not allowed to perform this operation, talk to your system administrator if you need access." title = "User Authorization System"

For the PC platform (VB and C#):

MessageBox.Show(msg,title,MessageBoxIcon.Exclamation,MessageBoxB uttons.OK)

For the FlexPendant platform:

VB:

GTPUMessageBox.Show(Me, Nothing, msg, title,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxIcon.Asterisk,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxButtons.OK)

C#:

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, null, msg, title,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxIcon.Asterisk,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxButtons.OK);

GetCurrentGrants and DemandGrant

Another possibility is to retrieve all grants for the current user calling

GetCurrentGrants

, then iterate over the grants collection and search the necessary grants.

Yet another solution is to call

DemandGrant

with one of the static

Grant

members as in argument.

If the user does not have the specified grant the FlexPendant SDK throws a

UasRejectException

and the PC SDK throws a

GrantDemandRejectedException

.

TIP!

Learn more about UAS and

Grant

members in the SDK Reference Help.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 71

4 Developing RAB applications

4.5. Exception handling

4.5. Exception handling

Overview

The .NET programming languages provide built-in support for exception handling, which allows the program to detect and recover from errors during execution.

In managed code, execution cannot continue in the same thread after an unhandled exception.

The thread terminates, and if it is the program thread, the program itself terminates. To avoid this, accurate exception handling should be used.

Try-catch-finally

Exceptions are handled in try

- catch

(finally

) blocks, which execute outside the normal flow of control.

The try

block wraps one or several statements to be executed. If an exception occurs within this block, execution jumps to the catch

block, which handles the exception.

The finally

block is executed when the

Try

block is exited, no matter if an exception has occurred and been handled. It is used to clean up system or controller resources.

If you do not know what exceptions to expect or how to handle them, you can catch them and do nothing. This, however, may result in difficult error tracing, as exceptions include information on what caused the problem. Therefore, try at least to display the exception message, either by using a message box or the types

Debug or

Trace

. See

Debug output on page 279

and

Trace and Debug on page 281

for further information.

Typecasting

72

When typecasting

Signal

or

RapidData

values, for example, there is a potential risk of typecast exceptions. To avoid this you can check the object using the is

operator for both value and reference types:

VB:

If TypeOf ARapidData.Value Is Num Then

Dim ANum As Num = DirectCast(ARapidData.Value, Num)

.....

C#: if (aRapidData.Value is Num)

{

Num aNum = (Num) aRapidData.Value;

....

}

In C# it is also possible to use the as

operator for reference types. A null value is returned if the type is not the expected one:

C#:

DigitalSignal di = this.aController.IOSystem.GetSignal(“UserSig”) as DigitalSignal; if (di == null)

{

MessageBox.Show(this, null, “Wrong type”);

}

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.5. Exception handling

Continued

Exception handling for the PC platform

Exceptions thrown from the controller are handled by the PC SDK

ExceptionManager

, which converts the internal HRESULT to a .NET exception with a reasonable exception description, before it is thrown to the custom application layer. The application handling of these exceptions should apply to general .NET rules.

Exceptions are expensive in a performance perspective and should be avoided if there are other alternatives. If possible use a try-finally

block to clean up system and unmanaged resource allocations.

Exception handling for the FlexPendant platform

The FlexPendant SDK provides several exception classes, which are used when errors occur.

If the operation is rejected by the controller safety access restriction mechanism, for example, a

RejectException

is thrown.

If an unhandled exception occurs the application crashes and TAF displays a gray message on the FlexPendant. After confirmation the FlexPendant will restart. To avoid this you should make sure that any potential error situations are dealt with properly by your code.

5.5_1

The message that you get when an unhandled error situation occurs may look like this. Do

NOT contact ABB, but fix the error handling of your application.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

73

4 Developing RAB applications

4.5. Exception handling

Continued

NOTE!

Learn how the exception classes of the FlexPendant SDK work by using the FlexPendant

SDK Reference Documentation. Also see

SDK exception classes on page 194

to get more detailed information about exception handling for the FlexPendant platform.

.NET Best Practices

.The .NET Framework Developer's Guide presents the following best practices for exception handling:

•

Know when to set up a try/catch block. For example, it may be a better idea to programmatically check for a condition that is likely to occur without using exception handling. For errors which occur routinely this is recommended, as exceptions take longer to handle.

• Use exception handling to catch unexpected errors. If the event is truly exceptional and is an error (such as an unexpected end-of-file), exception handling is the better choice as less code is executed in the normal case.Always order exceptions in catch blocks from the most specific to the least specific. This technique handles the specific exception before it is passed to a more general catch block.

74 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

4 Developing RAB applications

4.6. How to use the online help

4.6. How to use the online help

Overview

The online help comes with the installation of Robot Application Builder and is accessible from Windows Start menu.

The recommendation is to read this user’s guide carefully as you develop your first RAB application. FP SDK Reference and PC SDK Reference are important complements to this manual, as these make up the complete reference to the class libraries of RAB. See

Documentation and help on page 16

for details.

NOTE!

The SDK Reference is NOT integrated in Visual Studio. You must open it from the Start menu.

TIP!

See

Documentation and help on page 16

for the web address to RobotStudio Community,

where RAB developers discuss software problems and solutions online.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 75

4 Developing RAB applications

4.6. How to use the online help

76 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.1.1. About this chapter

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.1 Introduction

5.1.1. About this chapter

Overview

This chapter gives detailed information on how to use the FlexPendant SDK.

These topics are covered:

•

How to take advantage of some system features that support the use of customized screens.

• How to utilize the integrated Visual Studio wizard to set up a FlexPendant project.

•

How to add the FlexPendant SDK GUI controls to the Visual Studio Toolbox.

• How to build the user interface using the integrated design support.

•

How to program FlexPendant SDK GUI controls.

• How to launch other applications from your application.

•

How to implement controller functionality using CAPI.

The design support in Visual Studio enables you to visually lay out the application, reducing the need to write code. This speeds up development and gives you a more precise control of the appearance of your FP screens.

Using the FlexPendant SDK it is possible to launch several of the standard FlexPendant applications from your application, which is often a very handy alternative to handling complicated procedures on your own, such as reading and writing RAPID data for example.

The Controller API (CAPI) is at the core of the FlexPendant SDK. It is used to access the robot controller, which the FlexPendant is attached to. First there is information about how this public API is organized. Then each domain of CAPI is dealt with separately. There are code samples in C# and VB throughout the chapter.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 77

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.1.2. System features supporting the use of customized screens

5.1.2. System features supporting the use of customized screens

Flexible user interfaces

The FlexPendant can be adapted to end-users' specific needs in many different ways. It can be operated in 14 different languages, including Asian character-based languages such as

Japanese and Chinese. Left-handed operators can adapt the device from its default setting by simply rotating the display through 180 degrees. Four of the eight hard keys are programmable, i.e. their function can be assigned by the end-user.

Customized FlexPendant screens, tailored to end-users’ needs is yet another way of rendering the flexible solutions required by many customers. To support the use of customized screens there are a couple of features that you may want to tell the end-users of your application about.

Configure the FlexPendant

Using the FlexPendant configuration facilities (Control Panel - FlexPendant) it is possible to configure the FlexPendant to allow RAPID execution in manual mode from an FP SDK view.

You can also make the FlexPendant automatically display an SDK view at operating mode change.

Additional Test View

Set the FlexPendant configuration property Additional Test View if you want to be able to start

RAPID execution in manual mode with a custom application as the active view.

78

6.1.0_1

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.1.2. System features supporting the use of customized screens

Continued

View On Operating Mode Change

Set the FlexPendant configuration property View On Operating Mode Change if you want the custom application to become active when the controller operating mode is switched to auto, manual or manual full speed.

6.1.0_2

Use RAPID instruction to launch RAB application

The RAPID instruction

UIShow

(User Interface Show) is used to communicate with the user of the robot system via a FlexPendant application. Both RAB applications and standard applications can be launched using this instruction.

Example:

The RAPID code below launches the custom application TpsViewMyApp.

CONST string Name :="TpsViewMyApp.gtpu.dll";CONST string Type

:="ABB.Robotics.SDK.Views.TpsViewMyApp";UIShow Name, Type;

For this to work the robot system must have the RobotWare option FlexPendant Interface.

The assemblies TpsViewMyApp.dll and TpsViewMyApp.gtpu.dll must be located in the

HOME directory of the active robot system. (When the assemblies have been downloaded to the controller the FlexPendant must be restarted in order to load them.)

NOTE!

See the RAPID reference manual for further information about the

UIShow

instruction.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 79

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.2.1. Using the project template in Visual Studio

5.2 Setting up a new project

5.2.1. Using the project template in Visual Studio

Overview

It is very simple to set up a new FlexPendant project using the integrated project template that comes with the installation of Robot Application Builder. It will automatically add the most common SDK references to the project and auto-generate some source code for the main application window, in the selected programming language, either C# or Visual Basic.

NOTE!

To add another view to the FlexPendant project, you do not need to start a new project. See

Adding a view to a custom application on page 99

for information about how to do it.

Setup procedure

Follow these steps to create a FlexPendant project:

Step Action

1. On the File menu in Visual Studio, point to New and then click Project.

2. In VS 2005, in the New Project dialog select Visual C# / Smart Device /

FlexPendant or Other Languages/Visual Basic/Smart Device/FlexPendant. In VS

2008, select Visual C# / FlexPendant or Other Languages/Visual Basic/FlexPen-

dant).

80

6.1.1_1

NOTE!

If you have several RAB installations on your PC, there will be several templates to choose from. Make sure you select the template that match the RobotWare version that your application should target.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.2.1. Using the project template in Visual Studio

Continued

Step Action

3. Enter the name of the application in the Name field and where you want it to be stored in the Location field. Click OK.

NOTE!

The name has to start by “TpsView” . If you forget it an error will be generated by the ABB verification tool when the project is built.

4. The FlexPendant SDK Project Wizard is now launched. For information about how

to configure the application using this wizard see

FlexPendant TpsView attribute on page 54

and

Container style on page 97

. When you are ready click OK.

5. You need to set up the design support for the FlexPendant GUI controls before

starting programming. How this is done is detailed in

Setting up design support for

FlexPendant controls on page 83

.

NOTE!

If the SDK references seem to be missing in your FlexPendant project, see the following section for instructions about how to solve the problem.

Add any missing references

The SDK references needed by the FlexPendant project are added automatically when the

Project wizard is completed. However, there is a possibility that Visual Studio cannot provide the path to these dlls. If this is the case you should add the references path manually. Follow these steps:

Step Action

1. Look at the Solution Explorer of Visual Studio. If you have a C# project expand the

References node. Warning triangles mean that the path to the referenced dlls is missing.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6.1.1_2

For a VB project the Solution Explorer looks the same, except that there is no

References node.

Continues on next page

81

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.2.1. Using the project template in Visual Studio

Continued

Step Action

2. C#: Select the project icon, right-click and select Properties. Click the Reference

Paths tab and add the path to the SDK assemblies.

VB: Select the project icon, right-click and select Properties. Click the References tab. If the path to the SDK references is missing add it by browsing to the directory where they are located.

NOTE!

The default path is C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application

Builder 5.xx\FlexPendant SDK \bin.

3. Save the project. You will notice that any warning triangles in the Solution Explorer

References node will disappear.

82 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.2.2. Setting up design support for FlexPendant controls

5.2.2. Setting up design support for FlexPendant controls

Overview

This section describes how to make the FlexPendant GUI controls accessible in Visual

Studio.

Procedure

Follow these steps to add the FlexPendant controls to the Visual Studio Toolbox:

Step Action

1. On the View menu, select Toolbox.

2. Right click in the Toolbox area and select Add Tab.

3. Name the new toolbox tab, e.g. FlexPendant Controls.

4. Right click in the area of the new tab and select Choose Items.

5. In the Choose Toolbox Items dialog, browse to the directory where the

FlexPendant SDK assemblies are located and import the following assemblies:

• ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms.dll

• ABB.Robotics.GTPU.Windows.Forms.dll

• ABB.Robotics.DataBinding.dll

The default location is C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot

Application Builder\FlexPendant SDK 5.xx\bin.

6. In the Solution Explorer right-click view.cs (view.vb if you have a VB project) and select View Designer if you are not already in design mode.

As you see, the FlexPendant specific controls are now accessible in the Toolbox.

See

Introduction to visual design support on page 84

for information about how to

use them.

NOTE!

The way you use the Visual Studio Designer to implement FlexPendant controls is very similar to implementing ordinary .NET controls. In this manual useful information which may not be obvious for all users is provided. But oftentimes, it is the general Visual Studio

Help that will answer any questions you may have about control properties and the like.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 83

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

5.3 Building the user interface

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

What is visual design support?

Design Support for Compact Framework User Controls was a new feature of Visual Studio

2005. It enabled design support for FlexPendant SDK controls to be included in RAB 5.08.

From RAB 5.08 onwards you visually design the FlexPendant application user interface in the Visual Studio Designer. FlexPendant controls are dragged from the toolbox to the designer area, moved and resized by clicking and dragging. By applying different settings in the Properties window of a control, you refine its appearance and behavior.

To be able to use the visual design support you must add the FlexPendant controls to the

Visual Studio toolbox. How to do this is detailed in

Setting up design support for FlexPendant controls on page 83

.

NOTE!

Design support for FlexPendant controls has long been on RAB users’ wish list. It is indeed a time-saving feature, as most of the code supporting the graphical user interface is now auto generated.

Why special controls for the FlexPendant?

You may wonder why the standard Microsoft Windows controls have not been considered good enough to be used for the FlexPendant touch screen.

The answer is that some Windows controls may very well be used. Other Windows controls are however not so well suited for the FlexPendant touch screen. To navigate using your finger controls in particular need to be large enough. In some other cases the Windows controls simply do not look very good on the touch screen.

NOTE!

In the FP SDK Reference, click the Contents tab and the

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms node to get an overview and a short description of all

ABB controls you may use to create the user interface of a FlexPendant application.

TIP!

How to program these ABB controls is very similar to the equivalent Windows controls. If you need code examples the best source of information is usually MSDN. You may try http:/

/msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/cpref/html/ frlrfsystemwindowsformslistviewclasstopic.asp, for example, to find out how to program a

ListView

.

Illustration

84

The figure below shows the Visual Studio Toolbox with all of the FlexPendant controls to the left. In the Designer area to the right, a FlexPendant application is being developed. Part of the container control, along with a number of ABB and standard Windows controls can be

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

seen.

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

6.3.1_1

The following features are worth noting:

•

A Windows PictureBox control is used as the container of a photo.

• The FlexPendant button has a property called BackgroundImage, used to display an image. The ABB image library located in the Resources folder, which comes with the installation of Robot Application Builder, has numerous icons, which can be used by custom applications. You can of course also use photos and icons of your own.

•

Some of the ABB controls, such as the SignalBindingSource, have no graphical representation in design-time. As you see in the figure, they are placed in the components pane under the main form. Code is of course generated, just like for the controls that you see on the form.

• Usually a mix of Windows and ABB controls are used for a FlexPendant SDK application. For example, as there is no ABB RadioButton or CheckBox the equivalent Windows controls are used. In the figure, the standard Windows CheckBox is used.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

85

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

CAUTION!

Do not forget about the limited amount of memory available for custom applications when adding images or photos! See

Technical overview of the FlexPendant device on page 182

.

CAUTION!

Auto generated code for controls is located in the method InitializeComponent

. You should not tamper with the code inside this method. Any modifications or additions to auto generated code is usually best located in the constructor, after the call to

InitializeComponent.

Hands on - Hello world

Are you ready to program and test your first FlexPendant application? If you have not created a FlexPendant project and added the FlexPendant controls to the Visual Studio Toolbox you

need to do that first. See

Using the project template in Visual Studio on page 80

and

Setting up design support for FlexPendant controls on page 83

.

Follow these steps to create and test a simple custom application:

Step Action

1. Drag a FlexPendant button from the Toolbox to the Designer.

2. Double-click the button in the Designer, this opens the code editor.

3. As you see an event handler for the click event has been created. Add the code to launch the Hello World message in it:

{ private void button1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this.Parent

, null

, "Hello world!"

, "Application Message"

, System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxIcon.Asterisk

, System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxButtons.OK);

}

An alternative way of adding an event handler is shown in the next step.

NOTE!

The above code sample has no exception handling. A FlexPendant application to be used in industry must have exception handling in all event handlers. The FlexPendant has only ONE GUI thread, which all applications running on the FlexPendant share.

If your application breaks the only GUI thread, all of the applications will die and the

FlexPendant must be restarted manually. See

Exception handling on page 72

to find

out more about this important issue.

86

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

Step Action

4. Bring up the Properties window for the button by right clicking it in the Designer and selecting Properties. Click the events button (yellow flashing lightening) to see the events available for the ABB button. As shown by the figure, you have already connected an event handler to the click event.

6.3.1_1B

NOTE!

It is the default event of the control that you get when you double-click it in the

Designer. To add an event handler for another button event, bring up the Properties window and double-click the event you want to generate a handler for, e.g. a

FontChanged

event handler. You will enter the code editor, the cursor inside the generated event handler.

5. On the Build menu, click Build Solution and check that you did not get any compilation errors.

6. To test the application you need to deploy it to a robot system. If there is no robot system available, you must create a robot system by using the System Builder of

RobotStudio.

7. Copy the assembly (*.dll) and the proxy assembly (*.gtpu.dll) from the bin\Debug (or bin\Release) directory of your Visual Studio project to the HOME directory created by

RobotStudio when your robot system was created.

Example showing default paths for copy/paste:

C:\Data\Visual Studio 2005\Projects\TpsViewMyApp\TpsViewMyApp\bin\Debug\

C:\Systems\sys1_508\HOME

Note! If you have already started the virtual FlexPendant you need to close it before pasting the dlls.

8. Start the virtual FlexPendant.

9. On the ABB menu, find your application and open it.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

87

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

Step Action

10. Click the button. The Hello World message will be displayed.

88

6.3.1_2

NOTE!

See

Hands on - step 2 on page 89

below if you wish to know how to implement the

additional features shown above: application title, button background image, command bar with a menu item and an event handler to launch a standard view.

TIP!

When using the Virtual FlexPendant for test and debug you can automate the copy/paste procedure described in step seven above. This is how you do it:

1. Right click the project icon in the Solution Explorer and select Properties.

2. For a C# project, select the Build Events tab. (For a VB project click the Compile tab and then the Build Events button.)

3. Press the Edit Post-build button and add two commands which will copy the produced dlls to the directory of the robot system to run. Example:

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

copy "$(TargetDir)$(TargetName).dll" "C:\Systems\sys1" copy "$(TargetDir)$(TargetName).gtpu.dll" "C:\Systems\sys1"

Note! Do not remove the default post build command lines, which create the assembly proxy

(*gtpu.dll).

Hands on - step 2

This section details how to program the remaining features of the Hello World application shown in step nine above: application title, button background image, command bar with a menu item. You will also learn how to implement an event handler for the Launch View command.

When you create a FlexPendant project you choose Empty or Form in the FlexPendant

SDK Project Wizard. See

Empty or Form? on page 97

to understand the difference between

them. In our example Form is selected as the container control.

Step Action

1. If you selected Empty for your project you can change it to Form by exchanging

TpsControl with

TpsForm

directly in the source code, like this:

C#: public class TpsViewIRC5App14 : TpsForm, ITpsViewSetup,

ITpsViewActivation

VB:

Public Class TpsViewIRC5App14 Inherits TpsForm '(was

TpsControl before) Implements ITpsViewSetup,

ITpsViewActivation

Notice that the Designer now shows the title bar on top of the container control.

2. Right-click somewhere in the middle of the container control and select Properties.

3. Enter “This is my Hello World application” at the Text property. See the tip of

Empty or Form? on page 97

if the Text property is not available.

4. Still using the TpsForm Properties window, expand the MainMenu property node.

5. Click the MenuItems property and the browse button which appears once the property is selected.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

89

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

Step Action

6. In the MenuItem Collection Editor, which is now launched, click the Add button.

Then enter “Launch View” at the Text property. Click OK.

6.3.1_4

NOTE!

The added menuItem has its own MenuItems property. You use it if the “Launch

View” command is to present a menu instead of working as a button on the command

bar. How this can be done is further detailed in

How to add menu items on page 101

.

90

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

Step Action

7. Add an event handler with code that will launch the standard Jogging view when the

Launch View button is pressed.

Adding event handlers is done differently in Visual Studio depending on which programming language you are using.

For C#:

In the constructor, after the call to

InitializeComponent

, add a subscription to the click event of the “Launch View” command. Write: menuItem1.Click += then TAB twice. As you will notice, Visual Studio intellisense auto generates an event handler, and you only need to write the code for launching the Jogging view: this._launchService.LaunchView(FpStandardView.Jogging,null,fa lse,out this._cookieJog)

For VB:

Add an event handler using the drop down boxes above the Visual Studio Code

Viewer. Find and select MenuItem1 in the left drop down box and the Click event in the right drop down box. The event handler is now auto generated for you, and the only thing you need to do is to write the code for launching the Jogging view (see VB code in

Launching standard views on page 129

).

NOTE!

There is no possibility to attach an event handler in the properties window, like you do for a

Button

for example.

8. Declare the _launchService and the _cookieJog objects: private ABB.Robotics.Tps.Taf.ITpsViewLaunchServices

_launchService;private object _cookieJog;

9. Retrieve the

_launchService

object in the

Install

method of your class:

6.3.1_5

See

ITpsViewSetup Install on page 128

for VB code example.

10. In the designer, open the Properties window of the button.

11. Enter “Press Me” at the Text property.

12. Select the BackgroundImage property and browse to the Resources folder of the

RAB installation and import “IRB140.gif”.

(Default path: C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application

Builder\FlexPendant SDK 5.08\Resources)

13. Build, deploy and start the application, that is repeat step five to eight in

Hands on -

Hello world on page 86

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

91

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.1. Introduction to visual design support

Continued

Step Action

14. Press the Launch VIew command.

The Jogging view should open up and get focus.

TIP!

See

Using launch service on page 128

and

Using standard dialogs to modify data on page

131

if you want to know more about the possibilities to use already existing views for your application

Visual design and user experience

There is another definition of the term Visual design, which is not in the scope of this manual.

It has to do with how the design of the software user interface affects user experience. This is nonetheless an important topic for a FlexPendant application developer. Knowing what makes a user interface intuitive and easy to use is essential, as this is exactly what is expected from a custom operator interface.

TIP!

A FlexPendant style guide comes with the installation of RAB. It will help you to present application functionality in an intuitive way, teaching best practices of visual design and user experience from the FlexPendant perspective. It is a preliminary draft, but still very useful.

You may also want to study the Microsoft standard for visual design at: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dnwue/html/ch14a.asp

92 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.2. GUI controls and memory management

5.3.2. GUI controls and memory management

Overview

All of the FlexPendant SDK controls belong to the

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms

namespace. This namespace thus includes well over 40 classes and subclasses used to develop the user interface of a FlexPendant application.

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms.TpsControl

is the base type of all FlexPendant

SDK controls.

TpsControl

in turn extends

System.Windows.Forms.UserControl

TpsControl

may be used as a container control of a FlexPendant view. It also has the default implementation of

Dispose

, which is called in order to free allocated memory for a control which should no longer be used.

You may wonder why this is necessary, as the .NET framework has a garbage collector, which should release the developer of the duty to free allocated memory. The answer is the garbage collector does not always reclaim memory which is no longer used. Therefore, if you program an application meant to execute around the clock on a device with limited memory, you are still responsible for freeing memory which is no longer used. Neglecting to do so will result in permanent memory leaks.

How to avoid memory leaks

Look at this figure showing a number of controls (both ABB and Microsoft) and learn the basics about memory management for GUI controls. It is not so complicated, the most important thing is not to forget that cleaning up is your responsibility!

6.3.2_1

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

93

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.2. GUI controls and memory management

Continued

Learn and apply these the general rules for memory management of GUI controls.

• Controls with a graphical representation, e.g the ABB

Numpad

,

TabControl

,

GroupBox

,

TpsLabel

,

ListView

and the Microsoft

PicureBox

and

DataGrid

in the figure, are automatically added to the controls collection in

InitializeComponent. It may look like this: this.Controls.Add(this.numPad1);

•

If the figure above represents the first view of your application, controls with graphical representation will be disposed of by the base class of your view class when your application is shut down and the

Dispose

method is called by TAF. This happens when the following statement in your

Dispose

method is executed: base.Dispose(disposing);

• If, however, it represents a secondary view of your application (which is actually the case here, as you can tell from the close button on the command bar), you must call its

Dispose

method from the first view when it is closed. Its base class will then remove all controls that are part of its controls collection, like in the previous case.

•

GUI controls that have no graphical representation, but are located in the Components

pane under the form, e.g.

GTPUSaveFileDialog

,

RapidDataBindingSource

,

AlphaPad

etcetera, are NOT added to the controls collection by default. These are the ones that you need to be especially careful to remove, as no garbage collector will ever gather them. If you forget to explicitly call

Dispose

on such controls you will have caused a permanent memory leak. Carefully study the code example in the next section.

NOTE!

Microsoft and ABB controls behave in the same way. The Microsoft

ImageList

for example, which is commonly used in FlexPendant applications, has no graphical representation and must thus be explicitly removed by the application programmer.

Coding the Dispose method

The code example below shows how the

Dispose

method of the view shown in the figure above can be coded. All controls located in the components pane in the Designer must be explicitly removed by the programmer. Controls with a graphical representation will be removed when

Dispose

of the base class is executed. protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)

{ if (!IsDisposed)

{ try

{ if (disposing)

{

//Removes SaveFile dialog if(this.gtpuSaveFileDialog1 != null)

{ this.gtpuSaveFileDialog1.Dispose(); this.gtpuSaveFileDialog1 = null;

94

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.2. GUI controls and memory management

Continued

}

}

}

//Removes RapidDataBindingSource if(this.rapidDataBindingSource1 != null)

{ this.rapidDataBindingSource1.Dispose(); this.rapidDataBindingSource1 = null

}

//Removes Alphapad if(this.alphaPad1 != null)

{ this.alphaPad1.Dispose(); this.alphaPad1 = null

}

//Removes FolderBrowserDialog if(this.gtpuFolderBrowserDialog1 != null)

{ this.gtpuFolderBrowserDialog1.Dispose(); this.gtpuFolderBrowserDialog1 = null

}

//Removes ImageList if(this.imageList1 != null)

{ this.imageList1.Dispose(); this.imageList1 = null

}

}

} finally

{

//Removes all controls added to the controls collection

base.Dispose(disposing);

}

Finally, as this is a secondary view, we should call its

Dispose

method from the first view when it is closed down.

//This code is executed by the first view when the secondary view is closed void form2_Closed(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ if(form2 != null)

{ form2.Dispose(); form2 = null;

}

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

95

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.2. GUI controls and memory management

Continued

CAUTION!

If you forget to call

Dispose

on controls that are not part of the control collection of the class there will be memory leaks. This may cause the FlexPendant to run completely out of memory and crash. Usually, this will not happen when you try out the functionality of your application, but when it is executed and used continuously during production. To verify that a GUI control is really disposed of, you may set up a subscription to its Disposed event for example, and verify that it is triggered when you close down the view.

CAUTION!

All objects accessing robot controller services, i.e. unmanaged resources, must also be

removed by the application programmer. See

Memory management on page 184

for further information.

Freeing allocated memory for a GUI control

You are recommended to remove a GUI control in the

Dispose

method of the class that created it. If the control belongs to the first view of your application, it will be disposed of when TAF calls

Dispose

at application shut down. If it belongs to a secondary view, you are responsible for disposing of the secondary view and its controls.

C#: if (this.controlX != null)

{

controlX.Dispose();

controlX = null;

} base.Dispose(disposing);

VB:

If disposing Then

If Not controlX Is Nothing Then controlX.Dispose() controlX = Nothing

End If

End If

MyBase.Dispose(disposing)

NOTE!

When the last statement in the code example above is executed the base class will call

Dispose

on all controls added to the controls collection in

InitializeComponent

. This means that you do not need to call

Dispose

on such controls.

96 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.3. Container style

5.3.3. Container style

Overview

The container control of a FlexPendant application is 640x390 pixels, which is the exact size of the FlexPendant screen dedicated for a custom view. This section details the two different styles that can be used for a FlexPendant view: Empty and Form.

You select which one to use in the Style area of the FlexPendant SDK Project Wizard. To the left in the wizard, a preview helps you see the difference between the two styles.

6.2.2_1

Here Form is selected. The preview illustration shows a

TpsForm

. It has a

CommandBar

at the bottom and a

TpsCtrlTitleBar

at the top.

NOTE!

When adding a new view to an existing FlexPendant project, you choose which control to use in the Add New Item dialog box. See

Adding a view to a custom application on page 99

for information on how to add a new view to an existing project.

Empty or Form?

Empty

Your choice in the wizard determines the type that your view class will inherit. If you change your mind about this, it is easy to make the change directly in the auto generated code.

This is a plain

TpsControl

. It has neither a

CommandBar

, nor a

TpsCtrlTitleBar

.

The code definition of the class will look like this:

VB:

Public Class TpsViewMyApp Inherits TpsControl Implements

ITpsViewSetup, ITpsViewActivation

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

97

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.3. Container style

Continued

Form

This is a

TpsForm

, which is a specialized

TpsControl

.

The code definition of the class will look like this:

VB:

Public Class TpsViewMyApp Inherits TpsForm Implements

ITpsViewSetup, ITpsViewActivation

98

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.3. Container style

Continued

NOTE!

Often Empty is chosen as the first view of an FP SDK application. For any secondary view, which is to be opened from the first one, Form is the recommended container control.

NOTE!

When selecting Form you might wonder why the command bar is not visible in the designer.

The answer is that it remains invisible until a

MenuItem

has been added to it. This is done in the Properties window of the

TpsForm

, by applying the property MainMenu.

TIP!

If you select the

TitlePanel

or the

CommandBar

of a

TpsForm

you will see that the

Properties window is disabled. If you want to change the text of the title panel, or add menu items to the command bar, for example, you must select

TpsForm

by clicking somewhere in the middle and then modify its Text or MainMenu property.

How to build the command bar

The command bar is either ready-made, as for

TpsForm

, or used as a separate control available from the toolbox. If the command bar is ready-made, the design of it is done by modifying the MainMenu property of

TpsForm

. If used as a separate control, you design it by modifying its own properties. Apart from this, there is no difference in how you control the design.

An important thing to remember is that you have to manually add the code controlling what will happen when the user presses a menu item, as there are no event properties available in its Properties window.

See

Command bar on page 101

for further information on how to implement the control and

its event handlers.

CAUTION!

The command bar of the first view of a custom application should not have a Close button.

The reason is that all custom application must be closed down by TAF, which happens when the user presses the close [ x ] button in the upper right corner of the FlexPendant display.

(See

Definitions on page 18

for a definition of TAF or

Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle on page 52

for further information on TAF.)

Adding a view to a custom application

To add another view to the FlexPendant project, you do not need to start a new project. This is how to proceed:

Step Action

1

2

Right-click the project node in the Solution Explorer, point to Add and select New

Item.

Select one of the FlexPendant container controls available in the dialog box.

Normally it will be a Form.

Note! If you select Empty the code you write to open it from the first view is a bit different than if you are using Form as a secondary view.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

99

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.3. Container style

Continued

This way all of your views make up a single dll, which is convenient. Most of the time there is no point in dividing the application into several dlls.

Launching the view

The code for launching the secondary view is simple. It may look like this:

//declare the secondary view as a private member private View2 _view2;

//create the view and add subscription to its closed event, then launch view private void button1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ this._view2 = new View2(); this._view2.Closed += new EventHandler(view2_Closed); this._view2.ShowMe(this);

}

//dispose of the view when it has been closed void view2_Closed(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ this._view2.Closed -= new EventHandler(view2_Closed); this._view2.Dispose(); this._view2 = null;

}

NOTE!

Make sure that there is a natural way for the user to get back to the preceding view. The most intuitive way of doing this is to press a Close button or an OK or Cancel button on the command bar. If the secondary view is a

TpsForm

, this event handler closes it: void menuItem1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

{

this.CloseMe();

}

NOTE!

If you are using Empty as a secondary container control the code you write to launch it is: this._view2.Show();

It must be added to the first view’s control collection before it can be shown, just like an ordinary .NET control.

100 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.4. Command bar

5.3.4. Command bar

Overview

For the end-user the command bar is a central FlexPendant control and an important means

of interacting with the system. As described in

How to build the command bar on page 99

it can be ready-made or added to the container control from the VS Toolbox.

How to add menu items

If you use the

Form

container a command bar is built-in, but not visible until you add a

MenuItem collection to the MainMenu property of

TpsForm

. How to do this is shown in step

5 - 6 of

Hands on - step 2 on page 89

.

If you use Empty as container the command bar needs to be added from the Toolbox. In this case too, the commands are added as a collection of menu items.

6.3.4_1

The command bar in this figure has a collection of three menu items: Launch View, Close

View and Close. Moreover, the Launch View menu item has its own collection of menu items:

Rapid Data, Jogging and Backup Restore.

In the figure, as shown by the task bar, the Backup Restore view has been opened. It has been done by clicking the Backup Restore menu item. The user has then returned to the Hello

World application by using the task bar. If Close View is now pressed, the Backup Restore view will close down. The next section shows how event handlers for this command bar can be implemented.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

101

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.4. Command bar

Continued

How to add menu item event handling

Subscriptions to menu item events and event handling cannot be added using the design support, but have to be implemented by hand in the source file. The code example below shows how the command bar in the figure above can be implemented.

102

6.3.4_2

NOTE!

To launch a standard view the

ITpsViewLaunchServices

object, which can be saved by the

TpsView

class in its

Install

method, is needed. See

Using launch service on page 128

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.5. FlexPendant fonts

5.3.5. FlexPendant fonts

Overview

On the FlexPendant,

TpsFont

is used instead of standard Windows fonts. By using TpsFont you save limited device memory, as static references instead of new font instances will be used.

TpsFont

Tahoma

is the default font of the FlexPendant. It is also the font usually used internally by

TpsFont

. A number of different font sizes are pre-allocated and can be reused. You are recommended to use TpsFont instead of creating new font instances for both ABB and .NET

UI controls.

NOTE!

To be able to use Chinese or another language with non-western characters, you must use the

FlexPendant font,

TpsFont

, for any UI controls. It internally checks what language is currently active on the FlexPendant and uses the correct font for that language.

NOTE!

If you use other fonts than available on the FlexPendant, i.e. Tahoma and Courier New, the application will use Tahoma instead of the intended one.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 103

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.6. The use of icons

5.3.6. The use of icons

Overview

It is easy to display icons, images and photos on the FlexPendant touch screen. Utilizing this possibility is recommended, as many people find it easier to read pictures than text. Intuitive pictures can also be widely understood, which is a real advantage in a multinational setting.

NOTE!

The operating system of the first generation FlexPendant device (SX TPU 1) does not support images of more than 256 colors.

CAUTION!

Be aware of the limited memory resources of the FlexPendant device. Do not use larger

images than necessary. Also see

How large can a custom application be? on page 182

FlexPendant controls with images

Several FlexPendant controls support images, which are imported as bmp, jpg, gif or ico files when an Image, Icon or BackgroundImage property is set. These are some controls to be used with pictures:

•

MenuItem

•

Button

•

TpsCtrlTitlePanel

•

TabPage

•

ListViewItem

•

TpsForm

•

FPRapidData

,

FpToolCalibration

,

FpWorkObjectCalibration

•

GTPUSaveFileDialog

PictureBox and ImageList

There are also some Windows controls that can be used to display images.

Windows.Forms.PictureBox

is one such control. It can display graphics from a bitmap

(.bmp), icon (.ico), JPEG or GIF file. You set the Image property to the preferred image either at design time or at run time.

Windows.Forms.ImageList

can manage a collection of Image objects. The ImageList is typically used by another control, such as the

ListView

or the

TabControl

. You add bitmaps or icons to the

ImageList

, and the other control can choose an image from the

ImageList

index. How to use images for a

TabControl

is detailed in

How to add tab images on page 106

.

104

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.6. The use of icons

Continued

The TpsIcon class

The

TpsIcon

class offers static references to a number of icons used in the standard

FlexPendant applications. You may want to use some of these icons if they suit the application need.

TpsIcon

belongs to the namespace

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Drawing

.

TIP!

In the FP SDK Reference, click the Search tab and search for TpsIcon Members to get a short description of the ABB icons that are available as static properties.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 105

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.7. TabControl

5.3.7. TabControl

Overview

The

ABB.Robotics.Tps.TabControl is used and implemented much in the same way as a regular

System.Windows.Forms.TabControl

. The possibility to use tab icons, however, is an additional feature of the ABB

TabControl

.

Illustration

The figure below shows a

TabControl

and its Properties window. To add or remove tab pages you click the little arrow in the top right corner of the control or click Add new

TabPage at the bottom of the Properties window.

6.2.4_1

NOTE!

The ABB

TabControl

has no TabPages property. Depending on where in the TabControl you click, you select either the entire

TabControl

or one of the

TabPages

. To view the

Properties window for the T_ROB1

TabPage

in the figure, you would have to click the

T_ROB1 tab and then the T_ROB1 page below the tab.

How to add tab images

This is how you use the ImageList property to add icons to the tabs of the

TabControl

:

2

3

Step Action

1 Drag a

System.Windows.Forms.ImageList

to the Designer area. As you will notice it has no visual representation, but is placed on the components pane below the container control.

Display the Properties window of the ImageList.

Click the property Images and then the browse button, which will appear.

106

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.7. TabControl

Continued

Step Action

4 Click Add and import an image. Repeat until you have added the icons your

TabControl needs.

5

6

6.2.4_2

Now display the Properties window of the

TabControl

and select your

ImageList as the ImageList property.

Select one of the tab pages and set the property ImageIndex, which defines which of the images in the

ImageList

is to be used for the tab. Repeat this procedure for all tab pages.

How to add an event handler using the Properties window

It is easy to attach an event handler to a control by using the Properties window. This procedure shows how to make something happen when the user clicks a tab to select another tab page:

Step Action

1 In the Designer, select the

TabControl

and display the Properties window.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

107

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.7. TabControl

Continued

Step Action

2 Display the events available for the control by clicking the Events button.

3

4

5

6.3.4_3

Select the SelectedIndexChanged event and double click. A method name is now auto generated for the SelectedIndexChanged event. The code view takes focus, the cursor placed inside the generated event handler.

Add code to make something happen. For now this code will do: this.Text = "TabControl notifies change of tab pages";

This will change the title text of the TpsForm when a tab is clicked.

Test the functionality by building, deploying and starting the application. See step 5-

8 in

Hands on - Hello world on page 86

.

NOTE!

The subscription to the event has been done under the hood, and you do not need to bother about it. If you use C# you will notice that some code adding the subscription has been inserted in the

InitializeComponent

method: this.tabControl1.SelectedIndexChanged += new

System.EventHandler(this.tabControl1_SelectedIndexChanged);

Disposing TabControl

You do not need to explicitly call

Dispose

on the

TabControl

object. The reason is that

InitializeComponent

adds the tab pages to the controls collection of the

TabControl

, and the

TabControl

itself to the control collection of the container class. this.Controls.Add(this.tabControl1);

The

TabControl

is thus removed when the

Dispose

method of your container class calls

Dispose

on its base class like this: base.Dispose(disposing);

108 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.8. Button, TextBox and ComboBox

5.3.8. Button, TextBox and ComboBox

Overview

The FlexPendant button, text box and combo box controls are not very different from the equivalent Windows controls.

Using Button

A common size of a FlexPendant

Button

is 120 * 45 pixels; it can be a lot smaller than its default size. As opposed to a Windows button it can display an image. As pointed out in

Illustration on page 106

you use the property BackgroundImage and browse for the image

to be displayed.

Using TextBox

The

TextBox

control is multiline by default and uses the typical FlexPendant scroll bars as shown in the figure below.

6.2.7_1

Using ComboBox

The

ComboBox

is very similar to the

System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox

, but is visually improved to suit the FlexPendant touch screen. It can be statically populated using the Items property as illustrated by the figure. If you wish to populate it dynamically, you need to write code for it.

6.2.7_2

SelectedIndexChanged

is the most commonly used among the events. It occurs when the user selects another item from the list.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 109

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.9. AlphaPad

5.3.9. AlphaPad

Overview

The

AlphaPad

control is a virtual keyboard, which enables the user to enter strings. It covers the whole FlexPendant display. The figure shows its appearance in run time.

6.2.10_1

The

AlphaPad

has no graphical representation in design-time. When dragged from the

Toolbox to the Designer it is placed in the components pane, as shown by the figure in the next section. Code is of course generated for it, just like for controls that are visually laid out on the form in design-time.

110

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.9. AlphaPad

Continued

Launching the AlphaPad

You need to write some code to launch the virtual keyboard. This is how you do it:

C#: this.alphaPad1.ShowMe(this);

VB:

Me.AlphaPad1.ShowMe(Me)

NOTE!

The code for launching the

AlphaPad

should be executed by an appropriate event handler.

Adding event handlers

The Properties window can be used to program

AlphaPad

event handlers. You double click the event you want to respond to. This takes you to the code editor, the cursor placed inside the auto generated event handler, where you can write code to save user input to a member variable for example: if (alphaPad1.SelectedText != string.Empty)

{

_userInput = alphaPad1.SelectedText;

}

6.2.10_2

Validating the result at the Closing event

The

Closing

event is generated when the OK or Cancel button of the

AlphaPad

is pressed.

You can use this event to validate the string entered by the user. You can set the Cancel property of the event argument to true if you want the AlphaPad to remain open until a valid input value has been entered:

VB:

Private Sub NamePad_Closing(sender As Object, e As

System.ComponentModel.CancelEventArgs) Handles

NamePad.Closing

If NamePad.SelectedText.CompareTo("No Name") = 0 &&

NamePad.DialogResult =

System.Windows.Forms.DialogResult.OK Then e.Cancel = True

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 111

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.9. AlphaPad

Continued

C#:

End If

End Sub private void namePad_Closing(object sender,

System.ComponentModel.CancelEventArgs e)

{ if ((this.namePad.SelectedText.CompareTo("No Name") == 0) &&

(this.namePad.DialogResult ==

System.Windows.Forms.DialogResult.OK))

{ e.Cancel = true;

}

}

Using the result at the Closed event

The Closed event has to be caught by an event handler, as the object cannot be disposed of until it has been closed. The result may be retrieved in this event handler or in the Closing event handler. First check that OK and not Cancel was pressed, then retrieve user input.

Finally the AlphaPad should be disposed of.VB:

C#:

Private Sub NamePad_Closed(sender As Object, e As EventArgs)

Handles NamePad.Closed

If NamePad.DialogResult = Windows.Forms.DialogResult.OK Then

Me.answer = NamePad.SelectedText

End IfNamePad.Dispose()

End Sub private void namePad_Closed(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ if (this.namePad.DialogResult ==

System.Windows.Forms.DialogResult.OK)

{ this.answer = this.namePad.SelectedText;

} this.alphaPad1.Dispose();

}

112

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.9. AlphaPad

Continued

Removing the AlphaPad control

The

AlphaPad

is NOT added to the control collection, and will therefore NOT be disposed of by the base class of its container.

You are responsible for explicitly calling its

Dispose

method when it is no longer used. In the example above, this is done at the

Closed

event. This implies that a new

AlphaPad instance is created the next time its launch event is triggered.

Another way of dealing with this is to let the instance created by the Designer live until its container view is closed. This alternative means destroying it in the

Dispose

method of the container class: this.alphaPad1.Dispose();

CAUTION!

If you forget to call

Dispose

on an AlphaPad control you will have a memory leak. For further information see

GUI controls and memory management on page 93

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 113

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.10. ListView

5.3.10. ListView

Overview

The

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms.ListView

is very similar to a standard .Net

ListView

. The main difference is that its appearance is somewhat adapted to the use of a touch screen, as can be seen in the figure.

You can use the

ListView

control in a variety of ways. Usually you use it to display a list of items with item text and, optionally, an icon to identify the type of item. By using the

CheckBoxes property it is also possible to have a check box appear next to each item in the control, allowing users to check the items they want to perform an action on.

Illustration

The figure shows the Designer. You see two different ABB

ListView

lists, a standard .Net

ImageList

in the components pane under the lists and the Properties window for the

Calibration, HotEdit list.

6.3.10_1

Using properties to control appearance

The first list has CheckBoxes set to true. To have columns displayed View must be set to

Details. The columns are created by selecting Columns and adding any number of columns in the ColumnHeader Collection Editor. Scrollable has been set to true to enable the user to scroll the list to see all items. To have the current number of list items displayed

114

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.10. ListView

Continued

ShowNumberOfItems has been set to true. By using Sorting the list items can be alphabetically sorted, in this case in Descending order. The list is statically populated, using the Items property.

The View property of the other list is set to LargeIcon instead of Details. To display icons a standard .Net ImageList is used. You first launch the Properties window for the ImageList and add the images you want to use. At the LargeImageList property of the

ListView

you select the image list, and for each Item you select the ImageIndex to use, as is shown in the

ListViewItem Collection Editor.

Using the Properties window you can also add event handling. The most commonly used event is SelectedIndexChanged, which is triggered when a new list item is selected.

The Properties window can be used to statically populate the list. Usually, however, lists are populated dynamically. In

Getting signals using SignalFilter on page 167

there is a code example, which shows how I/O signals are dynamically displayed in an ABB

ListView

.

ABB specific properties

These properties are specific for the ABB

ListView

:

Property

MultiSelect

Scrollable

SelectionEnabledOver-

Scrollbuttons

ShowNumberOfItems

ShowSelection

Usage

Specifies whether multiple items in the control can be selected. The default is false.

Specifies whether a scroll bar is added to the control when there is not enough room to display all items. The default is true.

Note! The typical FlexPendant scroll bars are used by the first list in the figure above.

Specifies whether a touch inside the scroll region should select an item or scroll the list. The default is false.

Specifies whether the current number of items in the list is displayed. The default is true. Scroll bars should be added to the control to allow the user to see all the items. If the list is not scrollable the default value is false.

Specifies whether selection is shown or not. The default is false.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 115

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.11. CompactAlphaPad and NumPad

5.3.11. CompactAlphaPad and NumPad

Using CompactAlphaPad

The

CompactAlphaPad

control is used to enable user input. The input can be in the form of capital letters or numbers depending on the property

ActiveCharPanel

, which can be set to

Characters

or

Numeric

. It has a fixed size, big enough for the use of a finger to press its keys. There are properties available to define whether the numerical panel should support numerical operands, special characters, space and comma. All these properties are set to true in the figure:

Using NumPad

6.3.11_1

In order for your application to use the user input, you must connect to a text box, which displays the text or figures entered. This connection has to be coded manually, for example in the constructor, after the call to

InitializeComponent

, e.g.: this.compactAlphaPad1.Target = this.textBox1;

The

NumPad

is very similar to the CompactAlphaPad. You have to create a

Target

to be able to use the input, e.g.: this.numPad1.Target = this.textBox2;

116

6.3.11_2

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.12. GTPUMessageBox

5.3.12. GTPUMessageBox

Overview

GTPUMessageBox

is the message box control to be used by FlexPendant applications. You should not use the standard

.NET MessageBox

.

Design issues

The

GTPUMessageBox.Show

arguments include an owner argument, which is the control that displays the

MessageBox

, and a callback, which is a

MessageBoxEventHandler called when the MessageBox is closed.

Except this, it is used in the same way as the regular Windows

MessageBox

. It is used together with the regular Windows

MessageBoxButtons

and

MessageBoxIcon

.

Simple code example

The figure and code below show how to display a simple message on the FlexPendant using the

GTPUMessageBox

.

6.2.6_1

string message = "You did not enter a server name. Cancel this operation?"; string caption = "No Server Name Specified";

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, null, message, caption,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxIcon.Question,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxButtons.YesNo);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

117

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.12. GTPUMessageBox

Continued

NOTE!

Sometimes it can be a bit tricky to get the first argument right. The owner might be this, this.Parent or even this.Parent.Parent

.

Using a callback

The logics in your program determines if there is any need for a callback. In the previous example the callback argument was null

.The message box will just close down after the user has answered the question, no matter if the answer is Yes or No.

If we think about the message, it seems likely however, that something should happen if the user presses No. Let us change the implementation and use a callback for this purpose:

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, new

MessageBoxEventHandler(OnServerMessageClosed), message, caption, System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxIcon.Question,

System.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxButtons.YesNo);

//implement callback private void OnServerMessageClosed(object sender,

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms.MessageBoxEventArgs e)

{ if(e.DialogResult == System.Windows.Forms.DialogResult.No)

{

//Use default server...

}

}

If we really do not want to take action depending on how the user responds, it makes more sense to use OK instead of Yes and No as message box buttons, e.g:

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, null, "You are not allowed to perform this operation, talk to your system administrator if you need access",

"User Authorization System", MessageBoxIcon.Hand,

MessageBoxButtons.OK);

NOTE!

The last example uses a better message box title then the previous ones. The title preferably should tell the user from which part of the system the message originates.

118 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.13. GTPUFileDialog

5.3.13. GTPUFileDialog

Overview

The FlexPendant SDK provides a number of file dialogs used by the end-user to interact with the file system of the robot controller. These controls all inherit the abstract class

GTPUFileDialog

and belong to the namespace

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Windows.Forms.

File dialog types

There are three different types of file dialog controls:

Use...

when you want to...

GTPUOpenFileDialog

GTPUSaveFileDialog

Enable the user to specify a file to be retrieved from the controller file system.

Enable the user to specify a file to be saved to the controller file system.

GTPUFolderBrowserDialog

Enable the user to specify a folder on the controller file system.

NOTE!

The Open/Save/Browse file dialogs represent a convenient way for the user to specify folder and filename for a file operation. You should know, however, that the dialogs themselves do not perform any file operation, they only provide the controller file system path to be used by your application.

CAUTION!

When added to the VS Designer from the Toolbox, these controls will be placed in the components pane. They must be explicitly removed by a call to their

Dispose

method, e.g. in the

Dispose

method of the class that created them.

Illustration

Below is an illustration of the

GTPUSaveFileDialog

. The other file dialogs have almost the same appearance and the way they work is very similar. Using the icons of the command bar you create new folders and browse the controller file system. Together with the list and the

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

119

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.13. GTPUFileDialog

Continued

textbox, you specify a remote path. The FileName property should be read to retrieve this path. It returns the complete path to the controller file system, even though only the file name is visible in the File name textbox

120

6.3.13_2

6.3.13_1

Note! The button after the File name textbox opens the virtual keyboard, enabling the user to change the name of the file to be saved. The Filter property of the control is set to

TEXT(*.txt)|*.txt. The first part of the setting is displayed in the filter textbox.

This is the Properties window of this dialog:

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.13. GTPUFileDialog

Continued

Implementation details

The Properties window gives a clear description of a selected property, as can be seen in the figure above. Here only a few important properties will be detailed:

Property

Filter

FileName

InitialDirectory

Details

Carefully observe the string format when you set this property, e.g.: Program Files (*.pgf)|*.pgf

The first part is displayed in the combo box and the second part is used by the SDK to retrieve the correct files to be displayed in the list. You can also specify several filters, which the user can choose from.

Program Files (*.pgf)|*.pgf|All Files (*.*)|*.*;

Cannot be accessed in design-time by using the

Properties window, but should be manually coded when the file dialog is launched if it is a save file dialog.

When the dialog is closed, you should read this property.

It holds the remote path and file name of the file to be opened, or the remote path and file name of the file to be saved.

Note! Remember that remote refers to the controller file system and local to the FlexPendant file system.

Cannot be accessed in design-time by using the

Properties window. Specifies the initial directory to be displayed by the file dialog box.

NOTE!

For your program to be able to use the controller path selected by the end user, you need to read the FileName property at the

Closing/Closed

event of the file dialog.

Example

This piece of code sets

InitialDirectory

and

FileName

, then sets up a subscription to the

Closed

event and finally displays the

GTPUSaveFileDialog saveFileDialog.InitialDirectory = initialDir; saveFileDialog.FileName = programName; saveFileDialog.Closed += new

EventHandler(SaveProgram_FileDialog_EventHandler); saveFileDialog.ShowMe(_parent);

The code of the

SaveProgram_FileDialog_EventHandler

method retrieves the specified path of the remote file system, including the file name, by reading the

FileName property: string remotePath = saveFileDialog.Filename;

NOTE!

The file has not yet been saved to the robot controller. To do that you should call

FileSystem.PutFile using the retrieved path as the remoteFile argument. Likewise, to load a specified remote file to the FlexPendant file system you should use the retrieved path in the call to

FileSystem.GetFile.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 121

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

What is databinding?

Databinding is the process of binding a property of a GUI control to a data source, so that the property automatically reflects the value of the data source. In .NET CF 2.0 this functionality was simplified thanks to the new

BindingSource

class. This class encapsulates the complexity related to setting up and managing databinding.

FlexPendant SDK classes to be used as binding sources

In the FlexPendant SDK there are two classes that inherit .NET

BindingSource

:

RapidDataBindingSource

and

SignalBindingSource.

These classes enable binding to

RAPID data and IO signals respectively. They belong to the

ABB.Robotics.DataBinding

namespace and the assembly you need to reference is ABB.Robotics.DataBinding.dll.

RapidDataBindingSource

By using

RapidDataBindingSource

an automatic update of the bound GUI control takes place when the value of the specified RAPID data source in the controller has changed, or when the control is repainted.

SignalBindingSource

By using

SignalBindingSource an automatic update of the bound GUI control takes place when the value of the specified IO signal in the controller has changed, or when the control is repainted.

NOTE!

It is only possible to use persistent RAPID data (PERS) as data source.

NOTE!

If you want to let users modify RAPID data, launching the standard FlexPendant application

Program Data from your application is probably the best alternative. See

Using standard dialogs to modify data on page 131

for information about how to do it.

GUI example

Many different controls can be used with binding sources, e.g.

TpsLabel

,

TextBox

,

ListView

etc. The figure below shows two

System.Windows.Forms.DataGrid

controls that each bind to several objects defined in a

RapidDataBindingSource

and a

122

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

Continued

SignalBindingSource

. The labels in each

GroupBox

are bound to the same sources. As you see the grid displays all objects defined in the

BindingSource

control, whereas each label displays the currently selected grid row.

When a signal or a data value changes this GUI is automatically updated with the new value.

You do not have to write any code make this happen, as setting up subscriptions and updating the user interface is done by the underlying implementation.

6.3.14_1

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

123

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

Continued

CAUTION!

To avoid any memory leaks an explicit call to the

Dispose

method of

BindingSource controls must be made. However, the wrapper-objects

SignalObject

and

RapidDataObject

created for you are disposed of under the hood, so you do not need to worry about it.

How to use the VS designer for data binding

This section explains how to create the FlexPendant view shown in the previous section. First a

RapidDataBindingSource

control with bindings to specified RAPID data is created.Then the DataBindings property of a

TpsLabel

is used to bind the label to the binding source. Finally a standard .NET

DataGrid

is bound to the same binding source.

Step Action

1. Start by dragging a

RapidDataBindingSource

from the Toolbox to the Designer. It will be placed in the Components pane under the form. Open the Properties window and select the RapidDataList property to add the RAPID data you are interested in.

For each new RapidDataObject member you must specify module name, task name and name of the persistent RAPID data to bind.

124

6.3.14_2

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

Continued

Step Action

2. The next step is to open the Properties window for the label that is to display the value of the RAPID data. Expand the DataBindings node and select Advanced.

6.3.14_3

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

125

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

Continued

Step Action

3. In the Advanced Binding dialog box that appears, choose the already created

RapidDataBindingSource

in the Binding combo box, at the same time specifying which one of the RapidDataObject properties you want to bind to, in this case Value.

(The other properties available are variable name, task name and module name, as can be seen in the figure in step 1.)

You also select your preferred Data Source Update Mode, usually OnProperty-

Changed. The yellow marking in the list to the left shows that the binding has been done to the Text property of the label. When a control has been bound to a data source you will see the same yellow marking in its Properties window, at the bound property. See figure of step 2.

126

6.3.14_4

NOTE!

If a label has been bound to a data source with several member objects, the first one in the list is the one by default displayed by the label. If the selected index of the list changes (if the user selects a row in the grid for example) the label is updated auto-

matically to show the value of the selected index. See the figure in

GUI example on page 122

.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.3.14. DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals

Continued

Step Action

4. Now launch the Properties window of the

DataGrid

control. Set ColumnHeader-

Visible to true and select your data source at the DataSource property.

6.3.14_5

NOTE!

The

DataGrid

control displays only one row in design-time (See the figure of step 1).

In run-time, however, the entire collection of RapidDataObject members is displayed

(see the figure in

GUI example on page 122

).

SuspendBinding/ResumeBinding

SuspendBinding()

and

ResumeBinding()

have extended functionality compared to the methods of the inherited

BindingSource

class. Removing/adding subscriptions have been added, as subscribing to signals and RAPID data can be resource consuming. These methods can be used in the

Deactivate/Activate

methods, which are executed each time the user switches back and forth between different applications using the FlexPendant task bar. See

Application Framework usage - ITpsViewActivation on page 190

for further information.

If you suspend the binding you no longer get any updates if the data source is changed.

However, the binding still exists, so if DataSourceUpdateMode is set to OnValidation the value will be updated when you repaint the control, as the value from the controller will be read before it is repainted.

Method

SuspendBinding

ResumeBinding

Description

Suspends the binding and value change event.

Resumes the binding and value change event.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 127

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.4.1. Using launch service

5.4 Launching other views

5.4.1. Using launch service

Overview

The FlexPendant SDK provides a launch service, which enables a RAB application to start a standard ABB application, such as the program editor or the jogging view.

It is also possible to start another custom application by specifying proxy assembly name and the application view class.

For information about how to add and launch another view of your own application, see

Adding a view to a custom application on page 99

.

NOTE!

To launch a view in order to edit a specified rapid data instance, another mechanism is available. See

Using standard dialogs to modify data on page 131

for details.

ITpsViewSetup Install

It is only classes that inherit the

ITpsViewSetup

interface that can launch other applications.

The

Install

method, which is called when your custom application is launched, has a sender argument. Your application needs to save this object to be able to use the

ITpsViewLaunchServices

interface. It is used by the launch service to call

LaunchView and

CloseView

.

VB:

//declaration

Private iTpsSite As ITpsViewLaunchServices

.....

//Install method of the TpsView class

Function Install(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal data As

System.Object) As Boolean Implements ITpsViewSetup.Install

If TypeOf sender Is ITpsViewLaunchServices Then

// Save the sender object for later use

Me.iTpsSite = DirectCast(sender, ITpsViewLaunchServices)

Return True

End If

Return False

End Function

128

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.4.1. Using launch service

Continued

C#:

//declaration private ITpsViewLaunchServices iTpsSite;

......

//Install method of the TpsView class bool ITpsViewSetup.Install(object sender,object data)

{ if (sender is ITpsViewLaunchServices) {

// Save the sender object for later use this.iTpsSite = sender as ITpsViewLaunchServices; return true;

} return false;

}

Launching standard views

Using the

FpStandardView

enumerator, the following standard views can be started using the launch services:

• Program editor

•

Program data

• Jogging

•

Logoff

•

Backup/Restore

TIP!

Launching the Program data view is the best way to let end-users create new RAPID data.

NOTE!

To launch the program editor an initialization object of

RapidEditorInitData

type can be used as argument. It specifies the task, module and row that the Program editor should display when it opens. For the other standard views no

InitData

can be used.

LaunchView / CloseView example

In the example below, the program editor is launched at a specified routine. First initData is created. Then the reference to the sender object, retrieved by the

Install

method in the previous example, is used to call

LaunchView

.

The cookie out argument is later used to specify the view to be closed by the

CloseView method.

VB:

Dim initData As RapidEditorInitData = New RapidEditorInitData

(ATask, AModule, ARoutine.TextRange.Begin.Row)

If Not (Me.iTpsSite.LaunchView(FpStandardView.RapidEditor, initData, True, Me.cookieRapidEd) = True) Then

GTPUMessageBox.Show(Me, Nothing, "Could not start RapidEditor application")

Return

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 129

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.4.1. Using launch service

Continued

C#:

End If

......

Me.iTpsSite.CloseView(Me.cookieRapidEd)

RapidEditorInitData initData = new RapidEditorInitData(task, module,routine.TextRange.Begin.Row; if(this.iTpsSite.LaunchView(FpStandardView.RapidEditor,initData, true,out this.cookieRapidEd)!= true) {

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, null,"Could not start RapidEditor application"); return;

}

.....

this.iTpsSite.CloseView(this.cookieRapidEd);

What happens if the specified view is already open when the call is made? The third argument specifies application behavior in this case. If true

, another instance of the view is launched.

If false

, the already opened view gets focus. Notice, however, that creating a new instance is not possible for all standard views. The Jogging view, for example, is not allowed multiple instances.

Launching custom applications

The launch service can also be used to launch another RAB application. The name of the proxy assembly along with the fully qualified class name should be used as arguments.

VB:

If Not (Me.iTpsSite.LaunchView("TpsViewCustomApp.gtpu.dll",

"ABB.Robotics.SDK.Views.TpsViewCustomApp", Nothing, True,

Me.cookieUser) = True) Then

GTPUMessageBox.Show(Me, Nothing, "Could not start User application")

Return

End If

C#: if (this.iTpsSite.LaunchView("TpsViewCustomApp.gtpu.dll",

"ABB.Robotics.SDK.Views.TpsViewCustomApp", null, true, out this.cookieUser)!= true) {

GTPUMessageBox.Show(this, null,"Could not start User application"); return;

}

NOTE!

It is the namespace of the proxy assembly, ABB.Robotics.SDK.Views,which should be used to specify the

TpsView class.

NOTE!

By using the argument cookieUser your application can close the launched custom application in the same way as in the

Launching standard views on page 129

example above.

130 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.4.2. Using standard dialogs to modify data

5.4.2. Using standard dialogs to modify data

Overview

The

FpRapidData

,

FpToolCalibration

and

FpWorkObjectCalibration

dialogs take a

RapidData

reference as argument. When the dialog is opened it allows the user to directly operate on the referenced RapidData object, for example modifying a RAPID data variable or calibrate a work object. These dialogs are the ones used by the standard ABB applications.

They are ready-made and cannot be modified, except for the title.

Creating the dialog

As with all secondary dialogs, the reference to the dialog should be declared as a class variable. This is to make sure that the reference is available for

Dispose

. The

RapidData reference can be declared locally if it is disposed immediately after use, or else as a class variable. When the dialog has been created the title can be set using the

Text

property. A

Closed

event handler should be added to dispose the dialog. All three dialogs are created in the same way:

VB:

C#:

Private ARapidData As RapidData

Friend WithEvents FpRD As FpRapidData

.....

Me.ARapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData(ATaskName,

AModuleName, AVariableName)

Me.FpRD = New FpRapidData(Me.ARapidData)

Me.FpRD.Text = Me.ARapidData.Name

AddHandler Me.FpRD.Closed, AddressOf Me.FpRD_Closed

Me.FpRD.ShowMe(Me) private FpRapidData fpRD; private RapidData aRapidData;

......

this.aRapidData = this.aController.Rapid.GetRapidData(taskName, moduleName, variableName); this.fpRD = new FpRapidData(this.aRapidData); this.fpRD.Text = this.aRapidData.Name; this.fpRD.Closed += new EventHandler( fpRD_Closed); this.fpRD.ShowMe(this);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

131

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.4.2. Using standard dialogs to modify data

Continued

NOTE!

Verify that the

RapidData

is of correct

RapidDataType

for the dialog before using it, i.e. tooldata

for the FpToolCalibration dialog and wobjdata

for the FpWorkObjectCalibration

dialog. See

Type checking on page 132

below.

NOTE!

The FpRapidData dialog is created with a RapidData as in argument. If the RapidData is an array, an index argument is used to specify which element should be displayed (the first element is 1).

Type checking

When calling the

FpToolCalibration

or

FpWorkObjectCalibration

constructor the

RapidData

value should be type checked before use:

VB:

C#:

If TypeOf Me.ARapidData.Value Is ToolData Then

Me.FpTC = New FpToolCalibration(Me.ARapidData)

.....

End If if (this.aRapidData.Value is ToolData)

{ this.fpTC = new FpToolCalibration(this.aRapidData);

....

}

132 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.1. ABB.Robotics.Controllers

5.5 Using the Controller API

5.5.1. ABB.Robotics.Controllers

Controller API

To access the functions of the robot controller you utilize the class libraries of the FP SDK called Controller Application Programming Interface or CAPI. The assembly you need to reference to use controller functionality is ABB.Robotics.Controllers.dll.

CAPI domains

The top CAPI object is the

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Controller

, which has to be created before any access to the robot controller.

The class libraries are organized in different domains (namespaces), as shown by the contents tab of the FP SDK Reference below. The name of a domain tells you something about the kind of services you can expect from it.

6.4.1_1

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

133

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.1. ABB.Robotics.Controllers

Continued

CAPI and controller domains

This is a simplified illustration of how some

ABB.Robotics.Controllers

domains communicate with their respective domains in the robot controller:

6.4.1_2

NOTE!

In the normal case, a single

Controller

object is created and used throughout the application, its lifetime corresponding to that of the application.

What controller functionality is provided?

Plenty of robot controller functionality is offered by the classes and methods of the

FlexPendant SDK.

This table presents short descriptions of the kind of services that the different CAPI domains provide:

CAPI domain Services

Controllers

ConfigurationDomain Read or write the value of a configuration parameter to the configuration database of the controller.

EventLogDomain

FileSystemDomain

IOSystemDomain

Notification when a new event log message has been written to the controller. Title, message, category, sequence number and time stamp of the message.

Create, rename or remove files and directories in the controller file system. Retrieve a file from the controller and store it on the

FlexPendant and vice versa.

Read and modify I/O signals. Notify when a signal value has changed.

MotionDomain

Information about the controller, such as IP address, current user,

Mac address, operating mode, controller state etc. Notification when operating mode, state or mastership has changed. Backup and restore. Check if the user has the required UAS grant etc.

Get/set the coordinate system and motion mode for jogging of the active mechanical unit. Information whether the mechanical unit is calibrated or not. Provide name, task, number of axes, active tool and work object etc. of the mechanical unit. Notify when data of the mechanical unit has changed. Send a start jogging or a stop jogging request to the robot controller.

134

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.1. ABB.Robotics.Controllers

Continued

CAPI domain

RapidDomain

SystemInfoDomain

Services

Notification when execution status has changed. Start and stop

RAPID execution. Load Rapid programs. Create, read and write

RAPID data. Notification when RAPID data or RAPID program has changed. Notification when program pointer has changed. Search

RAPID symbols etc.

Information about the active system of the robot controller, e.g.

RobotWare version, system name, release and system paths, existing system options and installed additional options.

Releasing memory

Using CAPI you will create objects that reference unmanaged resources. (See

Definitions on page 18

.) It is necessary to explicitly deallocate the memory of such objects by calling their

Dispose

method when they are no longer needed (at application shut down at the latest).

Otherwise your application will leak memory, which is a scarce resource on the FlexPendant platform.

NOTE!

You may prevent memory leaks and other pitfalls, by studying the chapter

Robust

FlexPendant applications on page 181

.

FP SDK Reference

Although this manual covers a great deal of the FP SDK functionality, it is by no means complete. The FP SDK Reference, which you open from Windows Start button, is the complete reference to the functionality offered by the class libraries.

It also gives valuable code samples and remarks about methods requiring different UAS grants etc., which is not included in this manual.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 135

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.2. Accessing the controller

5.5.2. Accessing the controller

Overview

Making use of controller functionality requires special attention. Disposal of CAPI objects when closing a view or the entire application is vital to save memory. Another pitfall that must be avoided is updating the user interface on a worker thread.

Controller instance

Before accessing the controller functionality you need to instantiate the

Controller

object.

The best place to do this is normally in the

Install

method, which is called by TAF after the constructor of your view class has executed.

The

Controller

declaration should be done on class scope level:

VB:

Private AController As Controller

C#: private Controller aController;

The recommendation is to instantiate the

Controller

object in the

Install

method:

VB:

AController = New Controller

C#: aController = new Controller();

136

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.2. Accessing the controller

Continued

Using the

Controller

object you can access IO signals, RAPID data variables, event log messages etc. Most of these objects will be created explicitly and should be disposed of explicitly.

NOTE!

Avoid placing any code that may result in an exception before the method

InitializeComponent

. Then at least you have a user interface, where you can display a

MessageBox

with information about what went wrong.

NOTE!

It is recommended that if several classes need to access the controller, they all reference the same

Controller

object.

Subscribing to controller events

The

Controller

object provides several public events, which enable you to listen to operating mode changes, controller state changes, mastership changes etc.

VB:

AddHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf UpdateOP

AddHandler AController.StateChanged, AddressOf UpdateState

AddHandler AController.MastershipChanged, AddressOf UpdateMast

AddHandler AController.BackupFinished, AddressOf UpdateBack

C#:

AController.OperatingModeChanged += new

OperatingModeChangedEventHandler(UpdateOP);

AController.MastershipChanged += new

MastershipChangedEventHandler(UpdateMast);

Controller.BackupFinished += new

BackupFinishedEventHandler(UpdateBack);

Controller.StateChanged += new

StateChangedEventHandler(UpdateState);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

137

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.2. Accessing the controller

Continued

Create a backup

Using the

Controller

object you can call the

Backup

method. The argument is a string describing the directory path on the controller where the backup should be stored. As the backup process is performed asynchronously you can add an event handler to receive a

BackupCompleted

event when the backup is completed.

VB:

Dim BackupDir As String = "(BACKUP)$"+BackupDirName

AddHandler Me.AController.BackupCompleted, AddressOf

AController_BackupCompleted)

Me.AController.Backup(BackupDir)

C#: string backupDir = "(BACKUP)$"+backupDirName; this.aController.BackupCompleted += new

BackupEventHandler(controller_BackupCompleted); this.aController.Backup(backupDir);

NOTE!

There is also a

Restore

method available. The FP SDK reference is the complete

FlexPendant SDK programming guide and is more detailed than this manual. For the

Backup and

Restore

methods, for example, there are parameter descriptions, remarks, code examples etc.

Dispose

NOTE!

Controller events use their own threads. Study

Controller events and threads on page 67

to

find out how to avoid threading conflicts.

CAUTION!

Do not rely on receiving an initial event when setting up/activating a controller event. There is no guarantee an event will be triggered, so you had better read the initial state from the controller.

138

The disposal of the

Controller

object should be done in the

Uninstall or Dispose method of the application view class.

Make a check first that disposal has not already been done. Do not forget to remove any subscriptions to controller events before the

Dispose()

call:

VB:

If Not AController Is Nothing Then

RemoveHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf

OpMChange

AController.Dispose()

AController = Nothing

End If

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.2. Accessing the controller

Continued

C#: if (aController != null)

{ aController.OperatingModeChanged -= new

OperatingModeChangedEventHandler(OpMChange); aController.Dispose(); aController = null;

}

CAUTION!

VB programmers should be aware that it is a bit tricky to use

WithEvents

together with the

Dispose pattern on the .NET platform. When you use

WithEvents

the .NET framework automatically removes any subscriptions when the object is set to

Nothing

. If you look at the code sample above, which does NOT use

WithEvents

, you will understand why such behavior causes problems. When the controller reference is set to

Nothing

and the .NET framework tries to remove its subscription, the internal controller object has already been removed by the

Dispose

call in the preceding statement, and a

NullReferenceException is thrown. This is not specific to the FlexPendant SDK, but a Microsoft issue. To avoid it you are advised to use

AddHandler

and

RemoveHandler

like in the example.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 139

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

5.5.3. Rapid domain

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Overview

The

RapidDomain

namespace enables access to RAPID data in the robot system. There are numerous FP SDK classes representing the different RAPID data types. There is also a

UserDefined

class used to reference RECORD structures in RAPID.

The

ValueChanged

event enables notification from the controller when persistent RAPID data has changed.

TIP!

A convenient and user-friendly way to enable the end-user of your application to read and write to specific RAPID data is using the standard FlexPendant Program Data view. See

Using standard dialogs to modify data on page 131

for details about how this can be done.

TIP!

Using databinding for RAPID data is a quick way of implementing access to RAPID data.

See how this works in

DataBinding of RAPID data and IO signals on page 122

.

Providing the path to the RAPID data

To read or write to RAPID data you must first create a

RapidData

object. The path to the declaration of the data in the controller is passed as argument. If you don’t know the path you need to search for the RAPID data by using the

SearchRapidSymbol

functionality. See

SearchRapidSymbol method on page 157

.

Direct access

Direct access requires less memory and is faster, and is therefore recommended if you do not need to use the task and module objects afterwards.

The example below shows how to create a

RapidData

object that refers to the RAPID data instance “reg1” in the USER module.

VB:

Dim Rd As RapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData(

"T_ROB1", "USER", "reg1")

C#:

RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "USER",

"reg1");

Hierarchical access

140

If you need the task and module objects hierarchical access can be more efficient.

GetRapidData

exists in the Rapid, Task and Module class.

VB:

Rd = AController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1").GetModule("USER").

GetRapidData("reg1")

C#: rd = aController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1").GetModule("USER").

GetRapidData("reg1");

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

Accessing data declared in a shared module

If your application is to be used with a multi-move system (a system with one controller and several motion tasks/robots), it may happen that the RAPID instance you need to access is declared in a -Shared RAPID module. Such a module can be used by all tasks, T_ROB1,

T_ROB2 etc.

This example shows how to create a

RapidData

object that refers to the instance “reg100”, which is declared in a shared module.

VB:

Dim Rd As RapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData("reg100")

C#:

RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("reg100");

Another possibility is using the

Task

object to access the RAPID instance, like this:

Task tRob1 = aController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1");

RapidData rData = tRob1.GetRapidData("reg100");

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

141

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

NOTE!

If

GetRapidData

is called from

Rapid

the RAPID data will be found even if the -Shared module is configured to be hidden.

NOTE!

If the RAPID data does not exist, the return value is

Nothing/null

and an

ArgumentNullException

is thrown. A null check should be performed before trying to use the object.

Creating an object representing the RAPID data value

The

RapidData

object stores the path to the RAPID data. But this is not enough if you want to access its value (at least not if you want to modify it). To do that you need to create another object, which represents the value of the RAPID data.

In the

RapidDomain

namespace there are types representing the different RAPID data types.

To create the object needed to represent the RAPID data value you use the

RapidData property

Value

and cast it to the corresponding type, e.g.

Num, Bool or

Tooldata

.

This is how this is done if you want to access the value of a RAPID data of the RAPID data type bool

:

VB:

’declare a variable of data type RapidDomain.Bool

Dim rapidBool As RapidDomain.Bool

Dim rd As RapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData( "T_ROB1",

"MainModule", "flag" )

’test that data type is correct before cast

If TypeOf rd.Value Is RapidDomain.Bool Then rapidBool = DirectCast(rd.Value, RapidDomain.Bool)

’check if the value of the RAPID data is true

If (rapidBool.Value) Then

’ Do something...

End If

EndIf

C#:

//declare a variable of data type RapidDomain.Bool

RapidDomain.Bool rapidBool;

RapidDomain.RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "MainModule",

"flag");

//test that data type is correct before cast if (rd.Value is ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.Bool)

{ rapidBool =

(ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.Bool)rd.Value;

//assign the value of the RAPID data to a local variable bool boolValue = rapidBool.Value;

}

142

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

If you just want to read this variable you can use this technique instead of creating a

RapidDomain.

Bool

object:

VB:

C#:

Dim b As Boolean = Convert.ToBoolean(rd.Value.ToString) bool b = Convert.ToBoolean(rd.Value.ToString());

The

ToolData

type (representing the RAPID data type tooldata)

can be created like this:

VB:

Dim ATool As ToolData

If Rd.Value Is ToolData Then

ATool = DirectCast(Rd.Value, ToolData)

End If

C#:

ToolData aTool; if (rd.Value is ToolData)

{ aTool = (ToolData) rd.Value;

}

IRapidData.ToString method

All RapidDomain structures representing RAPID data types implement the

IRapidData interface. It has a

ToString

method, which returns the value of the RAPID data in the form of a string. This is a simple example: string boolValue = rapidBool.ToString();

The string is formatted according to the same principle as described in

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 144

below.

Here is an example of a more complex data type. The

ToolData Tframe

property is of the

Pose

type. Its

Trans

value is displayed in a label in the format [x, y, z].

VB:

C#:

Me.Label1.Text = ATool.Tframe.Trans.ToString() this.label1.Text = aTool.Tframe.Trans.ToString();

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

143

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

IRapidData.FillFromString method

The

IRapidData

interface also has a

FillFromString

method, which fills the object with a valid RAPID string representation. The method can always be used when you need to modify RAPID data. Using the method with the

RapidDomain.Bool

variable used earlier in the chapter will look like this: rapidBool.FillFromString("True")

Using it for a

RapidDomain.Num

variable is similar: rapidNum.FillFromString("10")

String format

The format is constructed recursively. An example is the easiest way of illustrating this.

Example:

The

RapidDomain.Pose

structure corresponds to the RAPID data type pose

, which describes how a coordinate system is displaced and rotated around another coordinate system.

public struct Pose : IRapidData

{ public Pos trans; public Orient rot;

}

This is an example in RAPID:

VAR pose frame1;

...

frame1.trans := [50, 0, 40]; frame1.rot := [1, 0, 0, 0];

The frame1 coordinate transformation is assigned a value that corresponds to a displacement in position where X=50 mm, Y=0 mm and Z=40 mm. There is no rotation.

As you see, the

RapidDomain.Pose

structure consists of two other structures, trans and rot.

The trans structure consists of three floats and the and rot structure consists of four doubles.

The

FillFromString

format for a

Pose

object is “[[1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0][10.0, 20.0, 30.0]]”.

This piece of code shows how to write a new value to a RAPID pose

variable:

VB:

C#:

If TypeOf rd.Value Is Pose Then

Dim rapidPose As Pose = DirectCast(rd.Value, Pose) rapidPose.FillFromString("[[1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0][10, 20, 30]]") rd.Value = rapidPose

End If if (rd.Value is Pose)

{

Pose rapidPose = (Pose) rd.Value; rapidPose.FillFromString("[[1.0, 0.5, 0.0, 0.0][10, 15, 10]]"); rd.Value = rapidPose;

}

144

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

NOTE!

Using the same principle arbitrarily long RAPID data types can be represented.

NOTE!

The string format must be carefully observed. If the string argument has the wrong format, a

RapidDataFormatException

is thrown.

Writing to RAPID data

Writing to RAPID data is only possible using the type cast

RapidData

value, to which the new value is assigned. To transfer the new value to the RAPID data in the controller you must finally assign the .NET object to the

Value

property of the RapidData object. This example uses the rapidBool object created in

Creating an object representing the RAPID data value on page 142

.

VB:

’Assign new value to .Net variable rapidBool.Value = False

’Write the new value to the data in the controller rd.Value = rapidBool

C#:

//Assign new value to .Net variable rapidBool.Value = false;

//Write to new value to the data in the controller rd.Value = rapidBool;

This was an easy example, as the value to change was a simple bool

. Often, however, RAPID uses complex structures. By using the

FillFromString

method you can assign a new value to any

RapidData

and write it to the controller.

The string must be formatted according to the principle described in the previous section. The following example shows how to write a new value to the pos

structure (x, y, z) of a RAPID tooldata:

VB:

Dim APos As Pos = New Pos

APos.FillFromString("[2,3,3]")

Me.ATool.Tframe.Trans = APos

Me.Rd.Value = Me.ATool

C#:

Pos aPos = new Pos(); aPos.FillFromString("[2,3,3]"); this.aTool.Tframe.Trans = aPos; this.rd.Value = this.aTool;

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

145

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

NOTE!

The new value is not written to the controller until the last statement is executed.

Letting the user know that RAPID data has changed

In order to be notified that RAPID data has changed you need to add a subscription to the

ValueChanged

event of the

RapidData

instance. Note, however, that this only works for

persistent RAPID data.

Add subscription

This is how you add a subscription to the

ValueChanged

event:

VB:

Addhandler Rd.ValueChanged, AddressOf Rd_ValueChanged

C#: this.rd.ValueChanged += rd_ValueChanged;

Handle event

Implement the event handler. Remember that controller events use their own threads, and avoid Winforms threading problems by the use of

Control.Invoke

, which forces the execution from the background thread to the GUI thread.

VB:

Private Sub Rd_ValueChanged(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

DataValueChangedEventArgs)

Me.Invoke(New EventHandler (AddressOf UpdateGUI), sender, e)

End Sub

C# private void rd_ValueChanged(object sender,

DataValueChangedEventArgs e)

{ this.Invoke(new EventHandler (UpdateGUI), sender, e);

}

See

Controller events and threads on page 67

to learn more about potential threading

conflicts in RAB applications.

Read new value from controlller

Update the user interface with the new value. As the value is not part of the event argument, you must use the

RapidData Value

property to retrieve the new value:

VB:

Private Sub UpdateGUI(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs)

Dim Tool1 As ToolData = DirectCast(Me.Rd.Value, ToolData)

Me.Label1.Text = Tool1.Tframe.Trans.ToString()

End Sub

146

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

C# private void UpdateGUI(object sender, System.EventArgs e)

{

ToolData tool1= (ToolData)this.rd.Value; this.label1.Text = tool1.Tframe.Trans.ToString();

}

NOTE!

Subscriptions work only for RAPID data declared as PERS.

RapidData disposal

Always dispose of

RapidData

objects when they are no longer needed. If you want to reuse a

RapidData

object, you should make sure that you dispose of the current object first.

VB:

If Not Rd Is Nothing Then

Rd.Dispose()

Rd = Nothing

End If

C#: if (rd != null)

{ rd.Dispose(); rd = null;

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 147

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.2. Handling RAPID arrays

5.5.3.2. Handling RAPID arrays

Overview

In RAPID you can have up to three dimensional arrays. These are accessible by using a

RapidData

object like any other RAPID data.

There are mainly two ways of accessing each individual element of an array: by indexers or by an enumerator.

TIP!

A convenient and user-friendly way of reading and writing array elements is using the standard Program Data view of the FlexPendant. You provide the element you want to have displayed as argument, and the user can view or manipulate the item the way it is usually done

on the FlexPendant. See

Using standard dialogs to modify data on page 131

.

ArrayData object

If the

RapidData references a RAPID array is

Value

property returns an object of

ArrayData

type. Before making a cast, check the type using the is

operator or by using the

IsArray

property on the

RapidData

object.

VB:

Dim RD As RapidData = AController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1",

"User", "string_array")

If RD.IsArray Then

Dim AD As ArrayData = DirectCast( RD.Value,ArrayData)

.....

End If

C#:

RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "User",

"string_array"); if (rd.IsArray)

{

ArrayData ad = (ArrayData)rd.Value;

.....

}

Array dimensions

The dimension of the array is returned by the Rank property. If you need to check the length of the individual arrays you can use the

GetLength

method on the

ArrayData

object passing the dimension index as argument.

VB:

C#:

Dim ARank As Integer = AD.Rank

Dim Len As Integer = AD.GetLength(ARank) int aRank = ad.Rank; int len = ad.GetLength(aRank);

148

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.2. Handling RAPID arrays

Continued

Array item access by using indexers

By the use of indexers you can access each array element, even in three dimensional arrays.

A combination of the

GetLength

method and

For

loops makes it possible to access any item:

VB:

Dim ASum As Double = 0R

Dim ANum As Num

If AD.Rank = 1 Then

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.Length

ANum = DirectCast(ad.[I], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

ElseIf AD.Rank = 2 Then

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(1)

For J As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(2)

ANum = DirectCast(ad[I, J], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

Next

Else

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(1)

For J As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(2)

For K As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(3)

ANum = DirectCast(ad[I, J, K], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

Next

Next

End If

C#: double sum = 0d;

Num aNum; if (ad.Rank == 1) { for (int i = 1; i <= ad.Length; i++)

{ aNum = (Num)ad.[i]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

149

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.2. Handling RAPID arrays

Continued

} elseif (ad.Rank == 2)

{ for(int i = 1; i< ad.GetLength(1); i++)

{ for (int j = 1; j <= ad.Length; j++)

{ aNum = (Num)ad.[i,j]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

}

} else { for(int i = 1; i< ad.GetLength(1); i++)

{ for(int j = 1; j< ad.GetLength(2); j++)

{ for (int k = 1; k <= ad.GetLength(3); k++)

{ aNum = (Num)ad.[i, j, k]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

}

}

}

Array item access using enumerator

You can also use the enumerator operation ( foreach

) like it is used by collections in .NET.

Notice that it can be used for both one dimension and multi-dimensional arrays to access each individual element. The previous example is a lot simpler this way:

VB:

C#:

Dim ASum As Double = 0R

Dim ANum As Num

For Each ANum As Num In AD

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next double sum = 0d;

Num aNum; foreach(Num aNum in ad)

{ aSum += (double)ANum;

}

150 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.3. ReadItem and WriteItem methods

5.5.3.3. ReadItem and WriteItem methods

Overview

An alternative way of accessing RAPID data stored in an array are the

ReadItem

and

WriteItem

methods.

ReadItem method

Using the

ReadItem

method you can directly access a RAPID data item in an array, e.g. an array with RobTargets or Nums. The index to the item is explicitly specified in the

ReadItem call. The first item is in position 1, i.e. the array is 1-based as in RAPID.

This example retrieves the second Num value in the first array of the RAPID data variable referenced by rd.

VB:

Dim ANum As Num aNum = DirectCast(rd.ReadItem(1, 2), Num)

C#:

Num aNum = (Num)rd.ReadItem(1, 2);

WriteItem method

In the same manner it is possible to use the

WriteItem

method to write to an individual

RAPID data item in an array. This example shows how to write the result of an individual robot operation into an array representing a total robot program with several operations:

VB:

Dim ANum As Num = New Num(OPERATION_OK) rd.WriteItem(ANum, 1, 2)

C#:

Num aNum = new Num(OPERATION_OK); rd.WriteItem(aNum, 1, 2);

NOTE!

If the index is out of bounds an

IndexOutOfRangeException

will be thrown.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 151

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

Overview

You often work with RECORD structures in RAPID code. To handle these unique data types a

UserDefined

class has been implemented. This class has properties and methods to handle individual components of a RECORD.

In some cases implementing your own .NET structure can improve application design and code maintenance.

Creating UserDefined object

The

UserDefined

constructor takes a

RapidDataType

object as argument. To retrieve a

RapidDataType

object the path to the declaration of the RAPID data type is passed as argument.

This example creates a

UserDefined

object referencing the RAPID RECORD processdata:

VB:

Dim rdt As RapidDataType rdt = Me.controller.Rapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1", "MyModule",

"processdata")

Dim processdata As UserDefined = New UserDefined(rdt)

C#

RapidDataType rdt; rdt = this.controller.Rapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata");

UserDefined processdata = new UserDefined(rdt);

NOTE!

If the module where the RECORD is defined is configured as -Shared you only provide the name of the data type as argument, like this: rdt = this.controller.Rapid.GetRapidDataType("processdata");

Reading UserDefined data

You can use a

UserDefined

object to read any kind of RECORD variable from the controller. The individual components of the RECORD are accessible using the

Components property and an index. Each

Component

can be read as a string.

VB:

C#:

Dim processdata As UserDefined = DirectCast(rd.Value, UserDefined)

Dim No1 As String = processdata.Components(0).ToString()

Dim No2 AS String = processdata.Components(1),ToString()

UserDefined processdata = (UserDefined) rd.Value; string no1 = processdata.Components[0].ToString(); string no2 = processdata.Components[1].ToString();

152

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

Continued

Each individual string can then be used in a

FillFromString

method to convert the component into a specific data type, e.g.

RobTarget

or

ToolData

. See

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 144

for details.

Writing to UserDefined data

If you want to modify

UserDefined

data and write it to the RECORD in the controller you must first read the

UserDefined

object and the apply new values using the

FillFromString

method. Then you perform a write operation using the

RapidData.Value

property.

VB: processdata.Components(0).FillFromString("[0,0,0]") processdata.Components(1).FillFromString("10") rd.Value = ud

C#: processdata.Components[0].FillFromString("[0,0,0]"); processdata.Components[1].FillFromString("10"); rd.Value = ud;

See

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 144

and

Writing to RAPID data on page 223

for further information and code samples.

Implement your own struct representing a RECORD

This example shows how you can create your own .NET data type representing a RECORD in the controller instead of using the

UsefDefined

type.

Creating ProcessData type

VB:

Dim rdt As RapidDataType = Me.ARapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata")

Dim p As ProcessData = New ProcessData(rdt) p.FillFromString(rd.Value.ToString())

C#

RapidDataType rdt = this.aRapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata");

ProcessData p = new ProcessData(rdt); p.FillFromString(rd.Value.ToString());

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

153

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

Continued

Implementing ProcessData struct

This example shows how the new data type

ProcessData may be implemented. As you see, this is done by using a .NET struct and letting ProcessData wrap the

UserDefined

object.

The struct implementation should include a

FillFromString

and

ToString

method, i.e. inherit the

IRapidData

interface. Any properties and methods may also be implemented.

VB:

Public Structure ProcessData

Implements IRapidData

Private data As UserDefined

Public Sub New(ByVal rdt As RapidDataType) data = New UserDefined(rdt)

End Sub

Private Property IntData() As UserDefined

Get

Return data

End Get

Set(ByVal Value As UserDefined) data = Value

End Set

End Property

.....

End Structure

C#: public struct ProcessData: IRapidData

{ private UserDefined data; public ProcessData(RapidDataType rdt)

{ data = new UserDefined(rdt);

} private UserDefined IntData

{ get { return data; } set { data = value; }

154

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

Continued

} public int StepOne

{ get

{

} set

{ int res =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components[0].ToString())

; return res;

IntData.Components[0] = new Num(value);

}

}

}

Implementing IRapidData methods

This piece of code shows how the two

IRapidData

methods

ToString

and

FillFromString

can be implemented.

VB:

Public Sub FillFromString(ByVal newValue As String) Implements

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.IRapidData.FillFromStr

ing

IntData.FillFromString(newValue)

End Sub

Public Overrides Function ToString() As String Implements

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.IRapidData.ToString

Return IntData.ToString()

End Function

C#: public void FillFromString(string newValue)

{

IntData.FillFromString(newValue);

} public override string ToString()

{ return IntData.ToString();

}

NOTE! The

ToString

method has to use the

Overrides

keyword in Visual Basic and the override

keyword in C#.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

155

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.4. UserDefined data

Continued

Property implementation

Each item in the RECORD structure should have a corresponding property in the extended

.NET data type. The get and set methods have to implement the conversion from/to controller data type to .NET data type.

VB:

Public Property Step() As Integer

Get

Dim res As Integer =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components(0).ToString())

Return res

End Get

Set(ByVal Value As Integer)

Dim tmp As Num = New Num tmp.FillFromNum(Value)

IntData.Components(0) = tmp

End Set

End Property

C#: public int Step

{ get

{ int res =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components[0].ToString()); return res;

} set

{

Num tmp = new Num(); tmp.FillFromNum(value);

IntData.Components[0] = tmp;

}

}

156 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

Overview

Most RAPID elements (variables, modules, tasks, records etc.) are members of a symbol table, in which their names are stored as part of a program tree structure.

It is possible to search this table and get a collection of

RapidSymbol

objects, each one including the RAPID object name, location and type.

SearchRapidSymbol method

The search must be configured carefully, due to the large amount of RAPID symbols in a system. To define a query you need to consider from where in the program tree the search should be performed, which symbols are of interest and what information you need for the symbols of interest.To enable search from different levels the

SearchRapidSymbol

method is a member of several different SDK classes, e.g.

Task

,

Module

and

Routine

. This example shows a search performed with

Task

as the starting point:

VB:

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "num", string.Empty)

C#:

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "num", string.Empty);

The

SearchRapidSymbol

method has three arguments. The first argument, of data type

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

, is detailed in the next section. The second and third arguments are detailed in the following sections.

Search properties

The

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

type is rather complex and requires some knowledge about RAPID concepts.

It is used to specify search method, type of RAPID symbol to search for, whether the search should be recursive, whether the symbols are local and/or global and whether or not the search result should include only symbols currently used by a program. If a property is not valid for a particular symbol, it will just be discarded and will not exclude the symbol from the search result.

The table describes the different properties of

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

.

Property Description

SearchMethod Specifies the direction of the search, which can be

Block

(down) or

Scope

(up). Example: If the starting point of the search is a routine, a block-search will return the symbols declared within the routine, whereas a scope-search will return the symbols accessible from the routine.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

157

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Property

SymbolType

Recursive

GlobalRapidSymbol

LocalRapidSymbol

IsInUse

Description

Specifies which RAPID type(s) you want to search for. The

SymbolTypes

enumeration includes

Constant

,

Variable

,

Persistent

,

Function

,

Procedure

,

Trap

,

Module

,

Task

,

Routine

,

RapidData

. etc. (

Routine

includes

Function

,

Procedure

and

Trap. RapidData

includes

Constant

,

Variable

and

Persistent

.)

For both block and scope search it is possible to choose if the search should stop at the next scope or block level or recursively continue until the root (or leaf) of the symbol table tree is reached.

Specifies whether global symbols should be included.

Specifies whether local symbols should be included.

Specifies whether only symbols in use by the loaded RAPID program should be searched.

Default instance

158

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

has a static method, which returns a default instance.

VB:

C#:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault();

The default instance has the following values:.

Property Description

SearchMethod

SymbolType

Recursive

GlobalRapidSymbol

LocalRapidSymbol

IsInUse

SymbolSearchMethod.Block

SymbolTypes.NoSymbol

True

True

True

True

Using this instance you can specify the search properties of the search you want to perform.

Example:

VB:

C#:

SProp.SearchMethod = SymbolSearchMethod.Scope

SProp.SymbolType = SymbolTypes.Constant Or SymbolTypes.Persistent

SProp.Recursive = False sProp.SearchMethod = SymbolSearchMethod.Scope; sProp.SymbolType = SymbolTypes.Constant | SymbolTypes.Persistent

sProp.Recursive = false;

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

NOTE!

The default instance has the property

SymbolType

set to

NoSymbol

, which means you need to specify it in order to perform a meaningful search.

NOTE!

The

SymbolType

property allows you to combine several types in the search. See the example above.

Data type argument

The second argument of the

SearchRapidSymbol

method is the RAPID data type written as a string. The data type should be written with small letters, e.g. “num”, “string” or

“robtarget”. It can also be specified as string.Empty

.

NOTE!

To search for a

UserDefined

data type the complete path to the module that holds the

RECORD definition must be passed, like this: result = tRob1.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp,"RAPID/T_ROB1/MyModule/

MyDataType", string.Empty);

However, if

MyModule

is configured as -Shared the system sees its data types as installed, and the task or module should not be included in the path result = tRob1.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp,"MyDataType", string.Empty);

Symbol name argument

The third argument is the name of the RAPID symbol. It can be specified as string.Empty

if the name of the symbol to retrieve is not known, or if the purpose is to search ALL “num” instances in the system for example.

Instead of the name of the RAPID symbol a regular expression can be used. The search mechanism will then match the pattern of the regular expression with the symbols in the symbol table. The regular expression string is not case sensitive

A regular expression is a powerful mechanism. It may consist of ordinary characters and meta characters. A meta character is an operator used to represent one or several ordinary characters, and the purpose is to extend the search.

Within a regular expression, all alphanumeric characters match themselves, i.e. the pattern

“abc” will only match a symbol named “abc”. To match all symbol names containing the character sequence “abc”, it is necessary to add some meta characters. The regular expression for this is “.*abc.*”.

The available meta character set is shown below:

Expression

.

^

[s]

[^s]

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Meaning

Any single character

Any symbol starting with

Any single character in the non-empty set s, where s is a sequence of characters. Ranges may be specified as c-c.

Any single character not in the set s.

Continues on next page

159

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Expression

r* r+ r?

(r) r | r’

.*

Meaning

Zero or more occurrences of the regular expression r.

One or more occurrences of the regular expression r.

Zero or one occurrence of the regular expression r.

The regular expression r. Used for separate that regular expression from another.

The regular expressions r or r’.

Any character sequence (zero, one or several characters).

Example 1

"^c.*"

Returns all symbols starting with c or C.

Example 2

"^reg[1-3]"

Returns reg1, Reg1, REG1, reg2, Reg2, REG2, reg3, Reg3 and REG3.

Example 3

"^c.*|^reg[1,2]"

Returns all symbols starting with c or C as well as reg1, Reg1, REG1, reg2, Reg2 and REG2.

SearchRapidSymbol example

This example searches for VAR, PERS or CONST num data in a task and its modules. The search is limited to globally declared symbols. By default the search method is

Block

, so it does not have to be set.

VB:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

SProp.SymbolTypes = SymbolTypes.RapidData

SProp.LocalRapidSymbol = False

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "num", string.Empty)

C#:

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault(); sProp.SymbolType = SymbolTypes.RapidData; sProp.LocalRapidSymbol = false;

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "num", string.Empty);

160

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Search for UserDefined RAPID data - example

In this example a user defined RECORD data type (“mydata”) is declared in a module

(“myModule”). Assuming that the end-user can declare and use data of this data type in any program module, the search method must be Block (default). A search for all “mydata” instances may look like this:

VB:

C#:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

SProp.SymbolType = SymbolTypes.RapidData

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "RAPID/T_ROB1/myModule/ mydata", string.Empty)

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault(); sProp.SymbolType = SymbolTypes.RapidData;

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "RAPID/T_ROB1/myModule/ mydata", string.Empty);

NOTE!

If myModule is configured as -Shared and all myData instances are declared in myModule the search method must be set to

Scope

and the

SearchRapidSymbol

call should look like this: rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "mydata", string.Empty);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 161

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.6. RAPID execution

5.5.3.6. RAPID execution

Start and Stop RAPID programs

You can start and stop RAPID execution using

Rapid

.

Start

and

Stop

methods. A

StartResult

from the

Start

method returns the result of the call. Start arguments can be used.

RegainMode

defines how the mechanical unit should handle path status at start.

ExecutionMode

specifies if the program should run continuously, step backward or go to the next Move instruction etc.

The

Stop

method can include a

StopMode

argument, specifying when the program should stop (after current cycle, after completed instruction or immediately).

VB:

AController.Rapid.Start(RegainMode.Regain,

ExecutionMode.Continous)

.....

AController.Rapid.Stop(StopMode.Instruction)

C#: aController.Rapid.Start(RegainMode.Regain,

ExecutionMode.Continous);

.....

aController.Rapid.Stop(StopMode.Instruction);

NOTE!

It is also possible to start a service routine or an ordinary routine without any parameters as if it were a service routine. See

Task.CallRoutine

and

Task.CancelRoutine

in the FP

SDK Reference Help for detailed information along with code samples.

RAPID execution change event

It is possible to subscribe to events that occur when a RAPID program starts to execute and when it stops. This is done on the

Rapid

property of the

Controller

object, like this:

VB:

AddHandler AController.Rapid.ExecutionStatusChanged, AddressOf

UpdateUI

C# aController.Rapid.ExecutionStatusChanged += new

ExecutionStatusChangedEventHandler(UpdateUI);

See

Letting the user know that RAPID data has changed on page 224

for information and

code example on how write the event handlers needed to update the GUI due to a controller event.

ResetProgramPointer method

The

ResetProgramPointer

method resets the program pointers of all tasks and sets them to the main entry point of the respective task.

VB:

AController.Rapid.ResetProgramPointer()

162

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.6. RAPID execution

Continued

C#: aController.Rapid.ResetProgramPointer();

NOTE!

It is also possible to set the program pointer to a specified routine, row or position. See

Task.SetProgramPointer

in the FP SDK Reference for information along with code samples.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 163

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.7. Modifying modules and programs

5.5.3.7. Modifying modules and programs

Overview

Using the

Task

object it is possible to load and save programs and individual modules. You can also unload programs, get the position of the motion pointer (MP) and the program pointer (PP) as well as modify a robot position.

Load modules and programs

To load a module or program file you need the path to the file in the file system of the controller. When the file is loaded into memory the

RapidLoadMode

enumeration argument,

Add

or

Replace

, specifies whether or not it should replace old modules or programs.

If the file extension is not a valid module (mod or sys) or program (pgf) extension an

ArgumentException

is thrown.

VB:

Try

ATask.LoadProgramFromFile(APrgFileName, RapidLoadMode.Replace)

ATask.LoadModuleFromFile(AModFileName, RapidLoadMode.Add)

Catch ex As ArgumentException

Return

End Try

C#: try

{ aTask.LoadProgramFromFile(aPrgFileName, RapidLoadMode.Replace); aTask.LoadModuleFromFile(aModFileName, RapidLoadMode.Add);

} catch (ArgumentException ex)

{ return;

}

Save and unload RAPID program

You can save a program using the

SaveProgramToFile

method and unload it using the

DeleteProgram

method. These methods save and unload all modules in the task.

VB:

Dim TaskCol As Task() = AController.Rapid.GetTasks()

Dim AnObject As Object

For Each AnObject in TaskCol

ATask = DirectCast(AnObject, Task)

ATask.ProgramName = ATask.Name

ATask.SaveProgramToFile(SaveDir)

ATask.DeleteProgram()

Next

164

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.3.7. Modifying modules and programs

Continued

C#:

Task[] taskCol = aController.Rapid.GetTasks(); foreach (Task aTask in taskCol)

{ aTask.PrograamName = aTask.Name; aTask.SaveProgramToFile(saveDir); aTask.DeleteProgram();

}

Save module

You can save a module by using the

Module.SaveToFile

method. As argument you use a path to the controller file system.

VB:

AModule.SaveToFile(AFilePath)

C# aModule.SaveToFile(aFilePath);

ProgramPointer and MotionPointer

The Task.

ProgramPointer

property returns the current location of the program pointer

(module, routine and row number), i.e. where the program is currently executing. The same functionality is available for motion pointer by using the

MotionPointer

property.

VB:

Dim APP As ProgramPointer = ATask.ProgramPointer

If Not APP = ProgramPointer.Empty Then

Dim AStartRow As Integer = APP.Start.Row

.....

C#:

ProgramPointer pp = aTask.ProgramPointer; if (pp != ProgramPointer.Empty)

{ int aStartRow = pp.Start.Row;

.....

}

ModifyPosition method

Using the ModifyPosition method of the

Task

object you can modify the position of a

RobTarget

instance in the currently loaded program. As arguments you supply a module

Name

as well as a

TextRange

object. The first

RobTarget

within the text range specified by the

TextRange

object will be changed using the current TCP of the active mechanical unit.

VB:

Me.ATask.ModifyPosition(AModule, ATextRange)

C#:

TIP!

this.ATask.ModifyPosition(aModule, aTextRange)

Learn more about

Task

methods and properties in the FP SDK Reference.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 165

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

5.5.4. IO system domain

Overview

A robot system uses input and output signals to control processes. Signals can be of digital, analog or group signal type. Such IO signals are accessible using the SDK.

Signal changes in the robot system are often significant, and there are many scenarios where end-users of the system need notification of signal changes.

Accessing signals

Accessing signals is done through the

Controller

object and its property

IOSystem

, which represents the IO signal space in the robot controller.

To access a signal you need the system name of the signal. The object that is returned from the

IOSystem

.

GetSignal

method is of type

Signal

.

VB:

Dim Signal1 As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("signal name")

C#:

Signal signal1 = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("signal name");

The returned

Signal

object has to be typecast to digital, analog or group signal. This example shows a how a signal of type

DigitalSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim DISig As DigitalSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, DigitalSignal)

C#:

DigitalSignal diSig = (DigitalSignal) signal1;

This example shows a how an

AnalogSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim AISig As AnalogSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, AnalogSignal)

C#:

AnalogSignal aiSig = (AnalogSignal) signal1;

This example shows a how a

GroupSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim GISig As GroupSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, GroupSignal)

C#:

GroupSignal giSig = (GroupSignal) signal1;

166

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

Continued

NOTE!

Remember to call the

Dispose

method of the signal when it should no longer be used.

Getting signals using SignalFilter

Instead of just getting one signal at a time you can use a filter and get a signal collection. Some of the

SignalFilter

flags are mutually exclusive, e.g.

SignalFilter.Analog

and

SignalFilter.Digital

. Others are inclusive, e.g.

SignalFilter.Digital

and

SignalFilter.Input

. You can combine the filter flags using the “|” character in C# and the

Or

operator in VB:

VB:

C#:

Dim ASigFilter As SignalFilter = SignalFilter.Digital Or

SignalFilter.Input

Dim Signals As SignalCollection =

AController.IOSystem.GetSignals(ASigFilter)

SignalFilter aSigFilter = SignalFilter.Digital |

SignalFilter.Input;

SignalCollection signals = aController.IOSystem.GetSignals(aSigFilter);

This piece of code iterates the signal collection and adds all signals to a

ListView

control.

The list has three columns displaying signal name, type and value:

VB:

For Each ASignal As Signal In Signals

Item = New ListViewItem(ASignal.Name)

Item.SubItems.Add(ASignal.Type.ToString())

Item.SubItems.Add(ASignal.Value.ToString())

Me.ListView1.Items.Add(Item)

Next

C#: foreach(Signal signal in signals)

{ item = new ListViewItem(signal.Name); item.SubItems.Add(signal.Type.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(signal.Value.ToString()); this.listView1.Items.Add(item);

}

If the signal objects are no longer needed they should be disposed of:

VB:

For Each ASignal As Signal In Signals

ASignal.Dispose()

Next

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

167

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

Continued

C#: foreach(Signal signal in signals)

{ signal.Dispose();

}

Reading IO signal values

These examples show how to read a digital and an analog signal.

Digital signal

This piece of code reads the digital signal DO1 and checks a checkbox if the signal value is

1 (ON):

VB:

Dim Sig As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("DO1")

Dim DigitalSig As DigitalSignal = DirectCast(Sig, DigitalSignal)

Dim val As Integer = DigitalSig.Get

If val = 1 Then

Me.CheckBox1.Checked = True

EndIf

C#:

Signal sig = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("DO1");

DigitalSignal digitalSig = (DigitalSignal)sig; int val = digitalSig.Get(); if (val == 1)

{ this.checkBox1.Checked = true;

}

Analog signal

This piece of code reads the value of the analog signal AO1 and displays it in a textbox:

VB:

Dim Sig As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("AO1")

Dim AnalogSig As AnalogSignal = DirectCast(Sig, AnalogSignal)

Dim AnalogSigVal As Single = AnalogSig.Value

Me.TextBox1.Text = AnalogSigVal.ToString()

C#:

Signal sig = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("AO1");

AnalogSignal analogSig = (AnalogSignal)sig; float analogSigVal = analogSig.Value; this.textBox1.Text = analogSigVal.ToString();

168

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

Continued

Writing IO signal values

In this example, new values for the IO signals that were retrieved in the previous example are written to the controller.

NOTE!

In manual mode a signal value can be modified only if the Access Level of the signal is ALL.

If not, the controller has to be in auto mode.

Digital signal

This piece of code changes the value of a digital signal in the controller when the user checks/ unchecks a checkbox:

VB:

Private Sub CheckBox1_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs) Handles CheckBox1.Click

If Me.CheckBox1.Checked Then

DigitalSig.Set()

Else

DigitalSig.Reset()

End If

End Sub

C#: private void checkBox1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ if (this.checkBox1.Checked)

{ digitalSig.Set();

} else

{ digitalSig.Reset();

}

}

NOTE! You can also set the value using the

Value

property.

Analog signal

This piece of code writes the value entered in a text box to the analog signal AO1. The value is converted from string to a float before it is written to the controller:

VB:

Dim AnalogSigVal As Single = Convert.ToSingle(Me.TextBox1.Text)

AnalogSig.Value = AnalogSigVal

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

169

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

Continued

C#: float analogSigVal = Convert.ToSingle(this.textBox1.Text); analogSig.Value = analogSigVal;

Listening to signal changes

Once a

Signal

object is available it is possible to add a subscription to its Changed event, which is triggered at a signal change such as changed value, changed simulated status or changed signal quality.

Visual Basic

Friend WithEvents AISig As AnalogSignal

...

AddHandler AISig.Changed, AddressOf AISig_Changed

...

Private Sub AISig_Changed(sender As Object, e As

SignalChangeEventArgs) Handles AISig.Changed

End Sub

C# this.aiSig.Changed +=new SignalChangeHandler(aiSig_Changed);

NOTE! The event handler skeleton is auto generated using the Tab key twice after “+=” in the above statement: private void aiSig_Changed(object sender, SignalChangeEventArgs e)

{ }

Start and stop subscriptions

It is recommended that you activate and deactivate subscriptions to the

Changed

event if these are not necessary throughout the lifetime of the application:

VB:

AddHandler AISig.Changed, AddressOf AISig_Changed

RemoveHandler AISig.Changed, AddressOf AISig_Changed

C#: this.aiSig.Changed += new SignalChangeHandler(aiSig_Changed); this.aiSig.Changed -= new SignalChangeHandler(aiSig_Changed);

170

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.4. IO system domain

Continued

Avoiding threading conflicts

It is important to keep in mind that all controller events use their own threads, which are different from the application GUI thread. This can cause problems if you want to display signal changes in the application GUI.

If an update of the user interface is not necessary, you do not need to take any special action, but can execute the event handler on the event thread. If, however, you need to show to the user that the signal has changed you should use the

Invoke

method. It forces execution to the window control thread and thus provides a solution to potential threading conflicts.

VB:

Me.Invoke(New ABB.Robotics.Controllers.IOSystemDomain.

SignalChangedEventHandler(AddressOf UpdateUI), New Object()

{sender, e})

C#: this.Invoke(new ABB.Robotics.Controllers.IOSystemDomain.

SignalChangedEventHandler(this.UpdateUI), new Object[]

{sender, e});

See

Controller events and threads on page 67

for further information.

Finding out the new value

The

SignalChangedEventArgs

object has a

NewSignalState

property, which has information about signal value, signal quality and whether the signal is simulated or not:

VB:

Private Sub UpdateUI(ByVal Sender As Object, ByVal e As

SignalChangedEventArgs)

Dim State As SignalState = e.NewSignalState

Dim val As Single

Val = State.Value

Me.TextBox1.Text = Val.ToString()

....

End Sub

C#: private void UpdateUI(object sender, SignalChangedEventArgs e)

{

SignalState state = e.NewSignalState;

....

float val = state.Value

this.textBox1.Text = val.ToString()

}

NOTE!

Do not count on receiving an initial event when setting up the subscription. To get initial information about the value of a signal you should read it using the

Value

property.

NOTE!

Make sure the subscription is removed before you dispose of the signal.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 171

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.5. Event log domain

5.5.5. Event log domain

Overview

Event log messages may contain information about controller status, RAPID execution, the running processes of the controller etc.

Using the SDK it is possible to either read messages in the queue or to use an event handler that will receive a copy of each new log message. An event log message contains queue type, event type, event time, event title and message.

Access the controller event log

You access the event log domain through the

Controller

property

EventLog

.

VB:

Private Log As EventLog = AController.EventLog

C#: private EventLog log = aController.EventLog;

Access event log categories

All event log messages are organized into categories. To search for an individual message you have to know what category it belongs to. The enumeration type,

CategoryType

, defines all available categories. You can get a category either by using the method

GetCategory

or by using the

Categories

property, which is an array of all available categories.

VB:

Dim Cat As EventLogCategory

Cat = Log.GetCategory(CategoryType.Program) or

C#:

Cat = Log.Categories(4)

EventLogCategory cat; cat = log.GetCategory(CategoryType.Program); or cat = log.GetCategory[4];

NOTE!

The

EventLogCategory

should be disposed of when it is no longer used.

Access event log messages

To access a message you use the

Messages

property of the

Category

object. A collection of messages is returned. The collection implements the

ICollection

and

IEnumerable interfaces , which means you can use the common operations for collections. Access is done either using an index or by iterating using foreach

.

VB:

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage = Cat.Messages(1)

172

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.5. Event log domain

Continued

or

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage

For Each Msg In Cat.Messages

Me.TextBox1.Text = Msg.Title

.....

Next Item

C#:

EventLogMessage msg = cat.Messages[1]; or foreach(EventLogMessage msg in cat.Messages)

{ this.textBox1.Text = msg.Title;

.....

}

MessageWritten event

It is possible to add an event handler that is notified when a new messages is written to the controller event log. This is done by subscribing to the EventLog event

MessageWritten

.

The event argument is of type

MessageWrittenEventArgs

and has a

Message

property, which holds the latest event log message.

VB:

Private Sub Log_MessageWritten(sender As Object, e As

MessageWrittenEventArgs) Handles Log.MessageWritten

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage = e.Message

End Sub

C#: private void log_MessageWritten(object sender,

MessageWrittenEventArgs e)

{

EventLogMessage msg = e.Message;

}

NOTE!

If the application user interface needs to be updated as a result of the event, you must delegate this job to the GUI thread using the

Invoke

method. See

Invoke method on page 68

for

further information and code samples.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 173

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.6. Motion domain

5.5.6. Motion domain

Overview

The

MotionDomain

namespace lets you access the mechanical units of the robot system.

Using a

MotionSystem

object you can send jogging commands to an mechanical unit and get or set the incremental jogging mode. Using a

MechanicalUnit

object you can get a lot of information about the mechanical units of the robot system.

You can also subscribe to changes of the mechanical unit, e.g. changed tool, work object, coordinated system, motion mode or incremental step size.

MotionSystem object

You access the motion system by using a the

Controller

property

MotionSystem

.

VB:

Private AMotionSystem As MotionSystem

AMotionSystem = AController.MotionSystem

C# private MotionSystem aMotionSystem; aMotionSystem = aController.MotionSystem;

Accessing Mechanical units

The mechanical units can be of different types, e.g. a robot with a TCP, a multiple axes manipulator or a single axis unit. Mechanical units are available through the

MotionSystem object. If only the active mechanical unit is of interest you may use the method

GetActiveMechanicalUnit

.

VB:

C#:

Dim AMechCol As MechanicalUnitCollection =

AController.MotionSystem.GetMechanicalUnits()

Dim AMechUnit As MechanicalUnit =

AController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit();

MechanicalUnitCollection aMechCol = aController.MotionSystem.GetMechanicalUnits();

MechanicalUnit aMechUnit = aController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit();

Jogging

174

It is possible to jog the active mechanical unit using the

SetJoggingCmd

method and the calls

JoggingStart

and

JoggingStop

. Depending on the selected

MotionMode

and

IncrementalMode

different joints and speeds are configured.

VB:

AController.MotionSystem.JoggingStop()

AMechUnit.MotionMode = MotionModeType.Linear

AController.MotionSystem.IncrementalMode =

IncrementalModeType.Small

AController.MotionSystem.SetJoggingCmd(-50, 50, 0)

AController.MotionSystem.JoggingStart()

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.6. Motion domain

Continued

C#: aController.MotionSystem.JoggingStop(); aMechUnit.MotionMode = MotionModeType.Linear; aController.MotionSystem.IncrementalMode =

IncrementalModeType.Small; aController.MotionSystem.SetJoggingCmd(-50, 50, 0); aController.MotionSystem.JoggingStart();

Mechanical unit properties and methods

There are numerous properties available for the mechanical unit, e.g.

Name,Model,

NumberOfAxes,SerialNumber,CoordinateSystem

,

MotionMode

,

IsCalibrated

,

Tool

and

WorkObject

etc. It is also possible to get the current position of a mechanical unit as a

RobTarget

or

JointTarget

.

VB:

Dim ARobTarget As RobTarget =

AController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPositio

n(CoordinateSystemType.World)

Dim AJointTarget As JointTarget =

AController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPosition()

C#:

RobTarget aRobTarget = aController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPositio

n(CoordinateSystemType.World);

JointTarget aJointTarget = aController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPosition()

;

DataChanged event

By subscribing to the

DataChanged

event of the

MechanicalUnit

object, you will be notified when a change of tool, work object, coordinated system, motion mode or incremental step size occurs.

VB:

AddHandler AMechUnit.DataChanged, AddressOf AMech_DataChanged

......

Private Sub AMech_DataChanged(sender As Object, e As

MechanicalUnitDataEventArgs)

Select e.Reason

Case MechanicalUnitDataChangeReason.Tool

ChangeOfTool(DirectCast(sender, MechanicalUnit))

Case MechanicalUnitDataChangeReason.WorkObject

......

End Select

End Sub

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

175

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.6. Motion domain

Continued

C#: aMechUnit.DataChanged += new

MechanicalUnitDataEventHandler(aMech_DataChanged);

.....

private void aMech_DataChanged(object sender,

MechanicalUnitDataEventArgs e) { switch (e.Reason) { case MechanicalUnitDataChangeReason.Tool:

ChangeOfTool((MechanicalUnit)sender) case MechanicalUnitDataChangeReason.WorkObject:

......

}

}

TIP!

Read more about the classes, methods and properties available in the

MotionDomain

in the

FP SDK Reference help.

176 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.7. File system domain

5.5.7. File system domain

Overview

Using the FlexPendant SDK FileSystemDomain you can create, save, load, rename and delete files on the controller. You can also create and delete directories.

Accessing files and directories

You access the file system domain through the

Controller

object property

FileSystem

.

VB:

Private AFileSystem As FileSystem = AController.FileSystem

C#:

FileSystem aFileSystem = aController.FileSystem;

Controller and FlexPendant file system

You can find and set the remote directory on the controller and the local directory on the

FlexPendant device by using the

RemoteDirectory

and

LocalDirectory

properties.

VB:

C#:

Dim RemoteDir As String = AController.FileSystem.RemoteDirectory

Dim LocalDir As String = AController.FileSystem.LocalDirectory

string remoteDir = aController.FileSystem.RemoteDirectory; string localDir = aController.FileSystem.LocalDirectory;

Loading controller files

You can load a file from the controller to the FlexPendant using the

GetFile

method. An exception is thrown if the operation fails. The arguments are complete paths including filenames.

VB:

AController.FileSystem.FileSystem.GetFile(RemoteFilePath,

LocalFilePath)

C#: aController.FileSystem.GetFile(remoteFilePath, localFilePath);

Saving files

You can save a file to the controller file system by using the

PutFile

method. An exception is thrown if the operation fails. The arguments are complete paths including filenames.

VB:

AController.FileSystem.PutFile(LocalFilePath, RemoteFilePath)

C#: aController.FileSystem.PutFile(localFilePath, remoteFilePath);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

177

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.7. File system domain

Continued

Getting multiple files and directories

The

FileSystem

class has a method called

GetFilesAndDirectories

. It can be used to retrieve an array of

ControllerFileSystemInfo

objects with information about individual files and directories. The

ControllerFileSystemInfo

object can then be cast to either a

ControllerFileInfo

object or a

ControllerDirectoryInfo

object.

This example uses search pattern to limit the search.

VB:

Dim AnArray As ControllerFileSystemInfo()

Dim info As ControllerFileSystemInfo

AnArray = AController.FileSystem.GetFilesAndDirectories("search pattern")

Dim I As Integer

For I = 0 To array.Length -1 info = AnArray(I)

......

Next

C#:

ControllerFileSystemInfo[] anArray;

ControllerFileSystemInfo info; anArray = aController.FileSystem.GetFilesAndDirectories("search pattern"); for (int i=0;i<anArray.Length;i++) { info = anArray[i];

......

}

Using search patterns

As seen in the example above, you can use search patterns to locate files and directories using the

GetFilesAndDirectories

method. The matching process uses the Wildcard pattern matching of Visual Studio. This is a brief summary:

Character in pattern

?

*

#

[charlist]

[!charlist]

Matches in string

Any single character

Zero or more characters

Any single digit (0–9)

Any single character in charlist

Any single character not in charlist

TIP!

Read more about the classes, methods and properties available in the

FileSystemDomain in the FP SDK Reference help.

178 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.8. System info domain

5.5.8. System info domain

Overview

The

SystemInfoDomain

provides information about the active robot system. This is mainly done through the static methods and properties of the

SystemInfo

class:

5.8.1_1

SystemInfo class

The functionality of the

SystemInfoDomain

is accessed by calling the static methods of the

SystemInfo

class.This is how to retrieve the path in the controller file system to the release

(ROBOTWARE) directory of the active system.

Example: string rWDir =

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.SystemInfoDomain.SystemInfo.Releas

ePath

Likewise, the path to the active system directory can be retrieved: string sysDir =

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.SystemInfoDomain.SystemInfo.System

Path

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

179

5 Using the FlexPendant SDK

5.5.8. System info domain

Continued

System options

Using the

SystemInfo.SystemOptions

property you can retrieve the system options of the currently active robot system. The result is an array of

SystemOption

objects. If you list the

Name

property of these objects you will get the same result as shown in the SystemBuilder of RobotStudio, e.g:

5.5.8_2

You can retrieve sub options of a system option by using the

SystemOption.SubOptions

property.

Additional options

Using the

SystemInfo.AdditionalOptions

property you can find out which additional options are installed in the robot system. The result is an array of

AdditionalOption objects. The

AdditionalOption.Path

property returns the path to the installation directory of the additional option.

The following

AdditionalOption

properties are available:

•

KeyString

•

Name

• Path

•

Type

• VersionInfo

NOTE!

You can find out more about the

SystemInfoDomain

in the FP SDK Reference, which also provides you with code examples.

180 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

5.5.8. System info domain

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 181

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.1. Introduction

6.1. Introduction

Overview

Developing an application for a device with limited resources, such as memory and process power, can be quite demanding. Moreover, to have an application executing around the clock will reveal weaknesses in design and implementation that may cause slow performance or

FlexPendant hangings.

At worst, your application will drain the FlexPendant of all memory during production, and cause an out-of-memory crash. It can even slow down the performance of the robot controller due to excessive use of controller resources.

This chapter describes how to design and implement reliable and well performing applications for the FlexPendant. It presents some good practices to utilize, as well as some pitfalls that should be avoided.

Technical overview of the FlexPendant device

The FlexPendant device consists of both hardware and software and is a complete computer in itself, with its own memory, file system, operating system and processor.

It is an integral part of IRC5, connected to the controller by an integrated cable and connector.

Using the hot plug button option, however, you can disconnect the FlexPendant in automatic mode and continue running without it.

There are ways to restart the FlexPendant without having to restart the controller (See

Restart the FlexPendant on page 49

). At a FlexPendant restart the assemblies and resources of

FlexPendant SDK applications are downloaded to the FlexPendant file system from the robot controller.

FlexPendant applications run on Windows CE, a scalable embedded operating system, and the .NET Compact Framework, which is Microsoft’s lightweight version of the .NET

Framework, intended for small devices.

This is the size of the FlexPendant touch screen:

FlexPendant screen

Size

Total display

FP SDK Application display

640 * 480 pixels

640 * 390 pixels

The FlexPendant uses these kinds of memory:

Memory type Function

Flash - 16 MB

RAM - 64 MB

E

2

PROM

Stores the FlexPendant standard software, the Windows

CE operating system in compressed format and the registry.

At boot time the compressed image is copied to RAM. All execution of code uses RAM.

Stores touch screen calibration values, joystick calibration values etc. Only used internally.

How large can a custom application be?

You may wonder about the maximum size of your custom application. There is no exact answer to that question, as there are many variables to take into account. For a rough estimation the table below can be used. As you see, the operating system uses about 8 MB

182

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.1. Introduction

Continued

and the ABB base software about 25 MB. This means that half of the available RAM memory is already used once the FlexPendant has started up. The standard applications of the ABB menu and the FlexPendant SDK applications will all share the memory that is left. As a rule of thumb, about 20 MB should be available for custom applications.

FlexPendant memory resources

RAM

Operating system

ABB base software

Custom applications

64 MB

8 MB

25 MB

~20 MB

This is some advice to help you make sure your application does not exceed the memory limitation:

1. Do not allow more than ONE instance by setting the

TpsViewType

parameter of the

TpsView

attribute to

Static

. See

Application type on page 56

for detailed information.

2. Avoid excessive use of images. Do not use bigger images than necessary. Check the size of the images your application will use.

3. Use fpcmd “-memShow” to check the amount of memory in use when your application is active. Open a couple of Program Editors and start RAPID execution.

See

Discover memory leaks on page 186

for further information.

4. Avoid static

data and methods.

5. Release memory for objects that are not used by calling their

Dispose

method.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 183

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.2. Memory management

6.2. Memory management

Garbage collection and Dispose

An important feature of the .NET runtime environment is the garbage collector, which reclaims not referenced memory from the managed heap. Generally, this means that the programmer should not have to free memory which has been allocated by the use of new

. A drawback, when memory is limited, is that the execution of the garbage collector is nondeterministic. There is no way of knowing exactly when garbage collection will be performed.

The

IDisposable

interface, however, represents a way to obtain deterministic deallocation of resources. You should therefore call

Dispose()

on all disposable object when they are no longer needed, as this will free up valuable resources as soon as possible.

Moreover, objects used to access robot controller resources, must be released by the custom application by an explicit call to their

Dispose

method.

SignalBindingSource

and

RapidDataBindingSouce

objects, as well as all other objects located in the components pane of the VS Designer must also be explicitly disposed of, or else your application will have a permanent memory leak.

NOTE!

The creator of an object implementing the

IDisposable

interface is responsible for its lifetime and for calling

Dispose

.

TIP!

You may wonder why the .NET garbage collector cannot ensure that all objects no longer referenced are finally destroyed? The FlexPendant development team have tried hard to remove any remaining objects of an SDK application at application shut down, for example implemented finalizers for the

TpsControl

,

RapidDataBindingSouce

and

SignalBindingSource

classes. Due to Microsoft’s implementation, however, the .NET

184

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.2. Memory management

Continued

runtime nonetheless refuses to destroy these objects unless their

Dispose

method is called.

This behavior is under debate. If you are curious to find out more about this, these community articles may be of interest.

Dispose, Finalization, and Resource Management (Joe Duffy): http://www.bluebytesoftware.com/blog/PermaLink.aspx?guid=88e62cdf-5919-4ac7-bc33-

20c06ae539ae

Garbage Collection: Automatic Memory Management in the Microsoft .NET

Framework (MSDN-magazine): ms-help://ms.msdnqtr.v80.en/ms.msdn.v80/dnmag00/ html/GCI.htm

Finalization - cbrumme's WebLog: http://blogs.msdn.com/cbrumme/archive/2004/02/20/

77460.aspx

Application Framework usage - ITpsViewSetup

The application framework TAF, which hosts the controls that make up a FlexPendant application, offers some mechanisms that should be used by client applications. See

Understanding FlexPendant application life cycle on page 52

to learn more about TAF.

Your application view class should implement

ITpsViewSetup

and

ITpsViewActivation

. See

ITpsViewSetup and ITpsViewActivation on page 58

for general information on these interfaces and

Application Framework usage - ITpsViewActivation on page 190

to learn how to use

ITpsViewActivation

to improve performance.

The

ITpsViewSetup

interface has two methods:

Install

and

Uninstall

.

Install

is called when the view is being created, right after the constructor has been executed.

Uninstall

is called when the client view is closed down. After

Uninstall

has been called,

TAF will also call the

Dispose

method of the view class. These methods thus offer the last opportunity for you to clean up and release memory and system resources held by the custom application.

NOTE!

The user should close down the application by using the close button, [x], in the upper right corner of the display, in the same way as the Program Data or other standard applications are closed. Never implement a close button on the first view. When the application is closed the correct way, first

Deactivate

, then

Uninstall

and finally

Dispose

will be called by TAF.

How to program the Dispose method - example

When starting a new FlexPendant project in Visual Studio a skeleton for the

Dispose

method is auto generated. You should use it to add code for cleaning up as shown by the figure below:

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

185

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.2. Memory management

Continued

7.2_1

NOTE!

Error handling should be added to the

Dispose

method (left out in the figure).

NOTE!

Ensure you have unsubscribed to any events from the robot controller before you call the

Dispose

method of a CAPI object. If it has been done in the

Deactivate

method, which is what is usually recommended, you should not do it again in the

Dispose

method. Also ensure you do not try to access an object after it has been disposed.

Discover memory leaks

When your application interacts with the robot controller, unmanaged objects are created under the hood. If you forget to call

Dispose

on such objects there will be memory leaks.

You are recommended to test the memory consumption of your application. Use a controller console window on your PC and the command fpcmd_enable_console_output

3 to enable printouts. Then use the

"-memShow"

command with a period argument that produces a printout every 500 second for example, like this:

-> period 500, fpcmd, “-memShow”

Result:

task spawned: id = 0xba7f3b8, name = t2value = 195556280 = 0xba7f3b8-> [fp]: Available memory: 20881408 (tot 40394752), disk: 737148 (tot 1728512) load: 54(261955)[fp]:

Test all functions of your application with several other FlexPendant views visible in the task bar and possibly one or several RAPID tasks executing. Observe how your implementation affects memory. The load component shows current memory load on the FlexPendant

186

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.2. Memory management

Continued

expressed in percentage and the figures in the parenthesis are number of ms after start-up.

Close your application and make sure the same amount of memory is available as before opening it.

The procedure below shows yet another way of checking that your application cleans up correctly:

Step Action

3

4

1

2

5

Log out from the FlexPendant by pressing Log Off on the ABB menu.

In the controller console window write fpcmd_enable_console_output

.

Write fpcmd "-a"

.

For each cpp class check Number of instances. It shall be 0, except for

AdaptController

(1) and

AdaptEventImpl

(1).

If the previous step shows that there are unmanaged objects left, you need to search your code for missing

Dispose

calls.

NOTE!

You must use the real FlexPendant device when verifying memory consumption and looking for memory leaks in your code.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 187

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.3. Performance

6.3. Performance

About performance

A FlexPendant application cannot meet hard real time demands. There should however be no difference in performance between a FlexPendant SDK application and the standard applications of the device. If your application is slow, the advice in this section will be useful.

TIP!

Do not get overwhelmed by the number of restrictions presented in this section. Most of the time you will not notice any difference if you decide to neglect a few of them. Yet - it is good to know what can be done whenever performance does become an issue.

Less code means faster code

A general piece of advice (maybe too obvious a recommendation) is that less code normally means faster code. Remember that methods that are executed frequently, such as

OnPaint

, event handlers etc. must be efficient. Everything that can be computed once and stored for future use should be computed only once.

Fewer controller accesses means faster code

The best thing you can do to improve performance is probably to ensure that you do not access controller functionality more often than necessary. To achieve this you need to understand CAPI, the SDK class libraries used to access robot controller functionality.

It is very easy to use a property of a class and not realize that an access to the controller is actually made. A general recommendation is to try to use subscriptions to controller information (events) where applicable, and let your application store updated values instead of performing numerous reading operations toward the same controller resource.

TIP!

You can easily get an estimate of the number of controller accesses your application performs in different user scenarios by using a robot controller console. The console command robdisp_watch 2

monitors and prints controller accesses made by the FlexPendant to the console. Press a button of your application for example, and study how the FlexPendant and the controller communicate in response to this action. Enter the command robdisp_watch

188

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.3. Performance

Continued

0

to turn this service off. (The monitor service slows down the response time of your application, due to printing to the console. So don’t get worried if your application seems unusually slow!)

NOTE!

Keep in mind that an excessive number of controller accesses will slow down the performance of your application. At worst, it may even affect the performance of the robot controller.

NOTE!

Excessive use of subscriptions may also be a problem. If your application has to handle a continuous load of Rapid data and I/O signal events, and your event handlers need to manipulate the data before presenting it, GUI interaction may become slow. As a rule of thumb, do not estimate more than 20 events/sec. and keep the event handlers thin.

Fewer objects means faster code

Fewer objects means better performance. If you know that an object will be used again, create it once and keep a reference. Also, try not to create objects that may not be used.

Reusing existing objects instead of creating new ones is especially important when executing the same code repeatedly, e.g. in tight loops.

This example shows how this should be done: object _o = new object(); for (int i = 0; i < 100000; i++)

{ ... }

TIP!

Do not create several

Controller

objects, but reuse it by sending it as a parameter when creating a new view, or share it between classes as a public property.

Transferring files

Transferring files between the device and the robot controller takes time and also occupies storage memory on the device. Write efficient and fault-tolerant code if it must be done.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

189

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.3. Performance

Continued

Application Framework usage - ITpsViewActivation

The

ITpsViewActivation

interface is used by TAF to hide and display your application. It has two methods:

Activate

and

Deactivate

. The former is called by TAF at the creation of the client view, right after the

ITpsViewSetup.Install

method has been executed. The latter is called at shut down of the client view, right before the

ITpsViewSetup.Uninstall method is executed.

The interface is also used when the user selects another application on the task bar. TAF then calls

ITpsViewActivation.Deactivate

(but not

ITpsViewSetup.Uninstall

).

Likewise, when the application regains focus via the task bar icon, TAF calls

ITpsViewActivation.Activate

(but not

ITpsViewSetup.Install

).

It is recommended to enable and disable any subscriptions to controller events in the

ITpsViewActivation

methods, as valuable resources should not be held when the application is not used. Note that current values should be read before enabling the subscription.

For the same reason, any timers can be activated and deactivated in these methods. That way timers will not run when other applications are in focus, thus saving processor power.

Excessive string manipulation is costly

The string class is an immutable type, i.e. once a string is created its value cannot be changed.

This means that string methods that seem to modify the string in fact create new strings.

Look at a this string concatenation example: string name = "192.168.126.1"; string str = "/" + name + "/" + "RAPID";

Four strings will be appended to one resulting string. No less than four additional strings will be created and allocated when the right hand side of the assignment is executed. A better idea is to use the

StringBuilder

class or string.Forma

t (which uses the

StringBuilder internally): string str = string.Format("/{0}/RAPID", name);

As a rule, if you are going to do only one string operation on a particular string, you can use the appropriate string method. It is when you start doing numerous string operations that you need to use

StringBuilder

or string.Format.

190

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.3. Performance

Continued

Avoid Control.Refresh

Control.Refresh()

must only be used when an immediate update of the GUI is absolutely required.

Refresh

makes a direct call to the

OnPaint

method of the Control, and is therefore much more costly than

Control.Invalidate()

.

Several calls to

Invalidate

will not mean several calls to

OnPaint

. When the GUI thread processes the

Invalidate

message all queued up messages of the same control are handled at the same time, thus saving process power.

NOTE!

In the 2.0 version of .NET CF there are new methods to be used for GUI controls inheriting

System.Windows.Forms.Control

:

•

SuspendLayout()

•

ResumeLayout()

•

BeginUpdate()

•

EndUpdate()

These methods are used to control GUI updates while modifying a GUI element. The control will not be drawn when

SuspendLayout

has been called, for example, but is blocked until

ResumeLayout

is called.

Avoid boxing and unboxing

A common reason for slow code is unintentional boxing and unboxing. To avoid this, you need to be aware of the difference between reference and value types. Reference types (the keyword class is used) are always allocated on the heap, while value types are allocated on the stack; unless embedded into a reference type.

Boxing is the operation where a value type, is converted to a reference type. It is done automatically when a reference to a value type is required. Then a new object will be created, allocated on the heap with a copy of the original data.

Here are some examples of not so obvious boxing/unboxing:

• Using the foreach

statement on an array that contains value types will cause the values to be boxed and unboxed.

•

Accessing values of a Hashtable with a value type key, will cause the key value to be boxed when the table is accessed.

• Using an ArrayList with value types; this should be avoided - use typed arrays instead.

Typed arrays are also better because of type safety, as type checking can be performed at compile time.

•

The following methods should be overridden in order to avoid unnecessary boxing/ unboxing: Equals( ), GetHashCode( ).

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

191

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.3. Performance

Continued

Foreach

Using a for

loop is often faster than using the foreach

statement, especially if a large number of iterations are made. The reason is that the JIT compiler (see

About terms and acronyms on page 18

) is prohibited to optimize the code execution when

foreach

is used.

However, foreach

makes the code more readable and is therefore a better option when performance is not crucial.

Reflection is performance demanding

Reflection is a mechanism used to read the meta data of an assembly. The

typeof

operator, for example, uses reflection to determine the type of an object. Another example is object.ToString()

, which also uses reflection.

As reflection is very performance demanding you are recommended to override or to avoid the

ToString()

method for reference types.

Efficiently parsing Xlm

XmlTextReader

and

XmlDocument

can both be used to parse xml data. The

XmlTextReader

is the preferred option in most cases; it is more light weight (less memory footprint) and a lot faster to instantiate. The limitation of the

XmlTextReader

is that forward only reading is possible.

The xml structure may also have an impact on performance. If xml data is organized in non- flat way, search operations will be faster, as a large portion of the information can be skipped.

This is achieved by using categories and sub categories.

192 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

6.4. Reliability

Overview

This section presents information on how to make the application robust. The most important mechanism related to robustness and reliability is error handling. Avoiding thread conflicts and memory leaks are however also important means of improving reliability.

Error handling in .NET applications

As already pointed out in this manual, Microsoft recommends that exceptions are used to discover and report anomalities in .NET applications. If you are not sure about when to use

exceptions or how to do the implementation you should read

Exception handling on page 72

to understand the general idea before moving on to the FlexPendant specific information of this section.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

193

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

Continued

SDK exception classes

The

ABB.Robotics

namespace provides quite a few exception classes, used by the

FlexPendant SDK and SDK applications. In addition, the SDK also uses

System

exceptions and may throw a

System.ArgumentException

object for example.

Whenever an exception is thrown, your application must catch it and take proper action. You catch an exception by using the try-catch(-finally)

statements. See

Exception handling on page 72

for further information about how to implement these statements.

As you see in the figure below

GeneralException

derives from

BaseException

, which in turn derives from

System.ApplicationException

of the .NET Framework class library.

ApplicationException

is thrown by user programs, such as the FlexPendant SDK, not by

the Common Language Runtime (CLR, see

Definitions on page 18

). It therefore represents a

way to differentiate between exceptions defined by applications versus exceptions defined by the system.

194

7.4_1

As you see there are derived types under

GeneralException

. These types are listed and briefly described below:

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

Continued

7.4_2

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

195

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

Continued

TIP!

Learn more about the FlexPendant SDK exception classes by using the FlexPendant SDK

Reference Documentation Help.

Thread affinity

You should be aware that execution of code modifying the user interface, has to be done on the thread that created the GUI control, the so called GUI thread.

An application initially starts with a single thread. Normally all user interface controls are created by this thread. Windows CE user interface objects are characterized by thread affinity, which means that they are closely coupled with the thread that created them.

Interacting with the message queue of an interface control from a thread other then the creating thread may cause data corruption or other errors. This restriction applies to the thread pool as well as to explicitly created threads.

When executing on a secondary thread, a so called worker thread, an update of the user interface must therefore be done very carefully, enforcing a switch to the GUI thread. This is in fact a very common scenario, as controller events use their own threads and should often be communicated to the end user by a GUI update.

NOTE!

Thread affinity is especially relevant as for robot controller events, as these by default execute on a background thread. See

GUI and controller event threads in conflict on page 68

and

Invoke method on page 68

for further information along with code samples. The following

section also deals with the same issue.

Invoke

In order to execute a method on the GUI thread

Control.Invoke

can be used. It should however be done carefully, as it makes a synchronous call to the specified event handler, which blocks execution until the GUI thread has finished executing the method. All concurrent calls to

Invoke

will be queued and executed in their queue order by the GUI thread. This could easily make the GUI less responsive.

There is now an asynchronous version of

Invoke

, which should be used instead whenever possible.

TpsControl.BeginInvoke

is a non blocking method, which lets the worker thread continue execution instead of waiting for the GUI thread to have processed the method

Remember that

Invoke

as well as BeginInvoke should only be used on code that modifies the user interface. You should keep the execution on the background thread as long as possible.

NOTE!

If your code tries to access a GUI control from a background thread the .NET common language runtime will throw a

System.NotSupportedException

.

Memory leaks

196

As FlexPendant applications are supposed to run without interruption, no memory leaks can be permitted. It is your responsibility to properly clean up and call

Dispose

. Take your time

studying

How to avoid memory leaks on page 93

,

Memory management on page 184

and

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

Continued

Technical overview of the FlexPendant device on page 182

.

Utilizing multi-threading

Threading enables your program to perform concurrent processing so you can do more than one operation at a time. For example, you can use threading to monitor input from the user, and perform background tasks simultaneously. The

System.Threading

namespace provides classes and interfaces which enable you to easily perform tasks such as creating and starting new threads, synchronizing multiple threads, suspending threads and aborting threads.

The classes

Thread

and

ThreadPool

can be used to execute methods on a worker thread.

Use

ThreadPool

for temporary usage of a background thread when a task is meant to terminate fairly soon. Use

Thread

only for background work that will persist, e.g. a thread that fetches data from the controller continuously.

There are two timers available in .NET CF that can be used to execute methods periodically at specified intervals. There is however, an important difference between these. The

System.Threading.Timer

executes the method on a background thread, while the

System.Windows.Forms.Timer

executes the method on the UI thread.

NOTE!

Use

System.Threading.Timer

if you want to poll data from the controller in order to reduce the load on the GUI thread.

Lock statement

The lock

statement is used in multi-threaded applications to make sure access to a part of the code is made by one thread exclusively. If a second thread attempts to lock code which has already been locked by another thread, it must wait until the lock is released.

Remember to limit the code segment that you want to control, i.e. only lock what is absolutely necessary to make the code thread safe:

Object thisLock = new Object(); lock (thisLock)

{

// Critical code section

}

Deadlocks must be avoided. They can occur if more than one lock is used. If more than one lock object must be held, they must always be locked and released in the same order, wherever they are used.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

197

6 Robust FlexPendant applications

6.4. Reliability

Continued

NOTE!

If a deadlock occurs, the FlexPendant system will hang. If this happens you should attach the device to the Visual Studio debugger and study the call stack of the threads in the Threads window.

CAUTION!

Using the lock

statement in combination with a call to

Invoke

is a potential cause to deadlock situations, since

Invoke

is a blocking call. In short, be careful if you use locks!

Multicast delegates

If a multicast delegate is executed, the execution of the delegates is terminated if an exception is thrown by one of the delegates. It means that the remaining delegates in the list will not be executed if an exception is thrown. This situation can cause erratic behavior, which may be tricky to trace and debug.

Therefore, if you have numerous delegates which are to execute as the result of the same event, you may want to implement the

GetInvocationList

method. It retrieves a list with a copy of the delegates. This list can be iterated and each delegate called directly:

7.4_3

198 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7 Using the PC SDK

6.4. Reliability

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 199

7 Using the PC SDK

7.1. Controller API

7.1. Controller API

PC SDK domains

The PC SDK class libraries are organized in the following domains:

• Controllers

•

ConfigurationDomain

• Discovery

•

EventLogDomain

• FileSystemDomain

•

Hosting

• IOSystemDomain

•

Messaging

• MotionDomain

•

RapidDomain

• UserAuthorizationManagement

CAPI illustration

The classes used to access robot controller functionality together make up the Controller API

(CAPI). Part of the CAPI object model is illustrated below:

200

8.2.2_1

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.1. Controller API

Continued

PC SDK Reference

This User’s Guide covers some of the PC SDK functionality, but is by no means a complete guide to the PC SDK.

The PC SDK Reference is the complete reference of the PC SDK class libraries. It should be your companion while programming.

It can be launched from Windows Start menu by pointing at Programs - ABB Industrial IT

- Robotics IT - Robot Application Builder 5.xx and selecting PC SDK Reference.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 201

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Overview

To get started programming let us create a simple application that will display all virtual and real controllers on the network. It should then be possible to log on to a controller and start

RAPID execution.

CAUTION!

Remote access to controllers must be handled carefully. Make sure you do not unintentionally disturb a system in production.

Set up the project

Follow these steps to set up a PC SDK project.

Step Action

1. On the File menu in Visual Studio, point to New and then click Project. Select a

Windows Application project.

2. Add the references to the PC SDK assemblies, ABB.Robotics.dll and ABB.Robot-

ics.Controllers.dll, to the project. The assemblies are located in the installation directory, by default at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot

Application Builder 5.xx\PC SDK.

3. Open Form1.cs and add the needed namespace statements at the top of the source code page:

VB:

Imports ABB.Robotics

Imports ABB.Robotics.Controllers

Imports ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Discovery

Imports ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain

C#: using ABB.Robotics; using ABB.Robotics.Controllers; using ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Discovery; using ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain;

4. In the Solution Explorer right-click Form1.cs and select View Designer. Create the Graphical User Interface according to the instruction in the next section.

202

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

Create the user interface

This picture shows the running PC SDK application that we will create. As you see both virtual and real controllers on the network are included in a network scan.

7.1_1

Follow these steps to create the user interface of the application:

Step Action

1. Change the Text property of the form to “Network scanning window”.

2. Change its Size to 850; 480.

3. Add a

ListView

control to the form. Set the following properties to get a similar look as in the figure above:

FullRowSelect - True

GridLines - True

View - Details

4. Add the columns for IPAdress, ID, Availability, Virtual, System name, RW Version and Controller name and adjust the width of the columns.

5. Add a

Panel

with a

Button

under the listview. Set the

Text

of the button.

Implement network scanning

To find all controllers on the network we start by declaring these member variables in the class

Form1

VB:

Private scanner As NetworkScanner = Nothing

Private controller As Controller = Nothing

Private tasks As Task() = Nothing

Private networkWatcher As NetworkWatcher = Nothing

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

203

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

204

C#: private NetworkScanner scanner = null; private Controller controller = null; private Task[] tasks = null; private NetworkWatcher networkwatcher = null;

As the application is supposed to scan the network as soon as it is started, we can put the code for it in the

Form1_Load

event handler, like this:

VB:

Me.scanner = New NetworkScanner

Me.scanner.Scan()

Dim controllers As ControllerInfoCollection =

Me.scanner.Controllers

Dim controllerInfo As ControllerInfo = Nothing

Dim item As ListViewItem

For Each controllerInfo In controllers item = New ListViewItem(controllerInfo.IPAddress.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Id) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Availability.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.IsVirtual.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.SystemName) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Version.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.ControllerName)

Me.listView1.Items.Add(item) item.Tag = controllerInfo

Next

C#: this.scanner = new NetworkScanner(); this.scanner.Scan();

ControllerInfoCollection controllers = scanner.Controllers;

ListViewItem item = null; foreach (ControllerInfo controllerInfo in controllers)

{

item = new ListViewItem(controllerInfo.IPAddress.ToString());

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Id);

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Availability.ToString());

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.IsVirtual.ToString());

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.SystemName);

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Version.ToString());

item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.ControllerName);

this.listView1.Items.Add(item);

}

item.Tag = controllerInfo;

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

Add a network watcher

By implementing a

NetworkWatcher

the application can supervise the network and detect when controllers are lost or added. This example shows how to program network supervision, and how to add a detected controller to the listview.

After having added a

NetworkWatcher

object to the

FormLoad

event handler, we add a subscription to its

Found

event.

VB:

Me.networkWatcher = New NetworkWatcher(Me.scanner.Controllers)

AddHandler Me.networkWatcher.Found, AddressOf Me.HandleFoundEvent

AddHandler Me.networkWatcher.Lost, AddressOf Me.HandleLostEvent

Me.networkWatcher.EnableRaisingEvents = True

C#: this.networkwatcher = new NetworkWatcher(scanner.Controllers); this.networkwatcher.Found += new EventHandler

<NetworkWatcherEventArgs>(HandleFoundEvent); this.networkwatcher.Lost += new EventHandler

<NetworkWatcherEventArgs>(HandleLostEvent); this.networkwatcher.EnableRaisingEvents = true;

NOTE!

In C# the event handler skeleton is auto generated using the Tab key twice after “+=” in the above statements. If you prefer, you can use a simplified syntax when using generic event handlers: networkwatcher.Found += HandleFoundEvent;

Handle event

As the events will be received on a background thread and should result in an update of the user interface the

Invoke

method must be called in the event handler. See

Invoke method on page 68

about how to force execution from background to GUI thread.

VB:

Private Sub HandleFoundEvent(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

NetworkWatcherEventArgs)

Me.Invoke(New NetworkWatcherEventHandler(AddressOf

AddControllerToListView), New Object() {sender, e})

End Sub

C#: void HandleFoundEvent(object sender, NetworkWatcherEventArgs e)

{ this.Invoke(new

EventHandler<NetworkWatcherEventArgs>(AddControllerToList

View), new Object[] { sender, e });

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

205

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

This event handler updates the user interface:

VB:

Private Sub AddControllerToListView(ByVal sender

As Object, ByVal e As NetworkWatcherEventArgs)

Dim controllerInfo As ControllerInfo = e.Controller

Dim item As ListViewItem = New ListViewItem( controllerInfo.IPAddress.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Id) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Availability.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.IsVirtual.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.SystemName) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Version.ToString()) item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.ControllerName)

Me.listView1.Items.Add(item) item.Tag = controllerInfo

End Sub

C#: private void AddControllerToListView(object sender,

NetworkWatcherEventArgs e)

{

ControllerInfo controllerInfo = e.Controller;

ListViewItem item = new

ListViewItem(controllerInfo.IPAddress.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Id); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Availability.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.IsVirtual.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.SystemName); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.Version.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(controllerInfo.ControllerName); this.listView1.Items.Add(item); item.Tag = controllerInfo;

}

Establish connection to controller

When the user double-clicks a controller in the list a connection to that controller should be established and the user should be logged on. Follow these steps to implement this functionality:

Step Action

1. Generate the

DoubleClick event of the

ListView

.

2. In the event handler create a

Controller

object that represents the selected robot controller.

3. Log on to the selected controller. See the code sample of

Implement event handler on page 207

.

206

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

Implement event handler

This example shows the code of the

ListView.DoubleClick

event handler:

VB:

Dim item As ListViewItem = Me.listView1.SelectedItems(0)

If Not item.Tag Is Nothing Then

Dim controllerInfo As ControllerInfo controllerInfo = DirectCast(item.Tag, ControllerInfo)

If controllerInfo.Availability = Availability.Available Then

If Not Me.controller Is Nothing Then

Me.controller.Logoff()

Me.controller.Dispose()

Me.controller = Nothing

End If

Me.controller = ControllerFactory.CreateFrom(controllerInfo)

Me.controller.Logon(UserInfo.DefaultUser)

End If

Else

MessageBox.Show("Selected controller not available.")

End If

C#:

ListViewItem item = this.listView1.SelectedItems[0]; if (item.Tag != null)

{

ControllerInfo controllerInfo = (ControllerInfo) item.Tag; if (controllerInfo.Availability == Availability.Available)

{ if (this.controller != null)

{ this.controller.Logoff(); this.controller.Dispose(); this.controller = null;

} this.controller =

ControllerFactory.CreateFrom(controllerInfo); this.controller.Logon(UserInfo.DefaultUser);

} else

{

MessageBox.Show("Selected controller not available.");

}

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

207

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

NOTE!

The check to see whether the

Controller

object already exists is important, as you should explicitly log off and dispose of any existing controller object before creating a new one. The reason is that a logon session allocates resources that should not be kept longer than necessary.

Start program execution

The

Click

event handler of the Start RAPID Program button should start program execution of the first RAPID task.

Starting RAPID execution in manual mode can only be done from the FlexPendant, so we need to check that the controller is in automatic mode before trying. We then need to request mastership of

Rapid

and call the

Start

method. If mastership is already held, by ourselves or another client, an

InvalidOperationException

will be thrown. For further information see

Mastership on page 41

.

It is necessary to release mastership whether or not the start operation succeeds. This can be done by calling

Release()

or

Dispose()

in a finally clause, as shown in the VB example, or by applying the using

mechanism, as shown in the C# example.

VB:

Private m As Mastership = Nothing

...

Private Sub Button1_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, ByVal e

As System.EventArgs) Handles Button1.Click

Dim m As ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Mastership = Nothing

Try

If controller.OperatingMode = ControllerOperatingMode.Auto

Then tasks = controller.Rapid.GetTasks() m = Mastership.Request(controller.Rapid)

'Perform operation tasks(0).Start()

Else

MessageBox.Show("Automatic mode is required to start execution from a remote client.")

End IfCatch ex As InvalidOperationException

MessageBox.Show("Mastership is held by another client.")

Catch ex As System.Exception

MessageBox.Show("Unexpected error occurred: " + ex.Message)

Finally

If Not m Is Nothing Then

If (m.IsMaster()) Then m.Release()

End If

End If

End Try

End Sub

208

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.2. Create a simple PC SDK application

Continued

C#: private void Button1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ try

{ if (_controller.OperatingMode ==

ControllerOperatingMode.Auto)

{ tasks = controller.Rapid.GetTasks();

}

} else

{ using (Mastership m =

Mastership.Request(controller.Rapid))

{

//Perform operation tasks[0].Start();

MessageBox.Show("Automatic mode is required to start execution from a remote client.");

}

} catch (System.InvalidOperationException ex)

{

MessageBox.Show("Mastership is held by another client.");

} catch (System.Exception ex)

{

MessageBox.Show("Unexpected error occurred: " + ex.Message);

}

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 209

7 Using the PC SDK

7.3. Discovery domain

7.3. Discovery domain

Overview

To create a connection to the controller from a PC SDK application it has to make use of the

Netscan functionality of the

Discovery

namespace. A

NetworkScanner

object must be created and a

Scan

call must be performed.

For the PC SDK to be able to establish a connection either RobotStudio or Robot

Communications Runtime must be installed on the PC hosting the PC SDK application.

Robot Communications Runtime can be installed from C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial

IT\Robotics IT\Robot Application Builder

5.xx\redistributable\RobotCommunicationRuntime if RobotStudio is not installed.

To find out what controllers are available on the network you use the

NetworkScanner methods

Scan

,

Find

,

GetControllers

and

GetRemoteControllers

.

NetworkScanner

The

NetworkScanner

class can be declared and instantiated at class level. No scanning is done until the

Scan

method is called. When the

GetControllers

method is called a collection of

ControllerInfo

objects is returned. Each such object holds information about a particular controller connected to the local network. Both virtual and real controllers are detected this way.

VB:

Private AScanner As NetworkScanner = New NetworkScanner

...’ Somewhere in the code

AScanner.Scan()

Dim ACollection As ControllerInfo() = AScanner.GetControllers()

C#: private NetworkScanner aScanner = new NetworkScanner();

... // Somewhere in the code aScanner.Scan();

ControllerInfo[] aCollection = aScanner.GetControllers();

See

Implement network scanning on page 203

for a complete code sample.

If only real controllers are of interest, you can first scan the network and then request only real controllers using the

NetworkScannerSearchCriterias

enumeration in the

GetControllers

method.

VB:

Dim ACollection As ControllerInfo() =

AScanner.GetControllers(NetworkScannerSearchCriterias.Real)

C#:

ControllerInfo[] aCollection = aScanner.GetControllers(NetworkScannerSearchCriterias.Real)

;

210

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.3. Discovery domain

Continued

If you know which controller system you want to connect to you can call the

Find

method, which finds a specified controller on the network. It takes the system ID as a System.Guid data type as argument. The system’s globally unique identifier (GUID) can be find in the

system.guid file in the INTERNAL folder of the robot system file system.

ControllerInfo object

When a network scan is performed a collection of

ControllerInfo

objects is returned. The

ControllerInfo object has information about availability. Remember that the ControllerInfo object is not updated when controller status changes. If you again need to find out if a controller is available, you need to perform a new network scan or use an existing

Controller

object and check the status directly.

Add controllers from outside local network

A network scan is done only on the local network. To detect controllers outside the local network you need to supply the IP address of the controller using the static

AddRemoteController

method or configuring it in the App.config file. See

PC application configuration on page 43

for further information.

If you supply the controller IP address you either use a string argument or a

System.Net.IPAddress

object.

VB:

Dim AnIPAddress As System.Net.IPAddress

Try

AnIPAddress = System.Net.IPAddress.Parse(Me.TextBox1.Text)

NetworkScanner.AddRemoteController(AnIPAddress)

Catch ex As FormatException

Me.TextBox1.Text = "Wrong IP address format"

End Try

C#:

System.Net.IPAddress ipAddress; try

{

} catch (FormatException ex)

{ ipAddress = System.Net.IPAddress.Parse(Me.textBox1.Text);

NetworkScanner.AddRemoteController(ipAddress);

Me.textBox1.Text = "Wrong IP address format";

}

NetworkWatcher

By using a

NetworkWatcher

object you can supervise network changes and find out when a new controller is found or when a controller is lost. See

Add a network watcher on page 205

for a complete code example.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 211

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

7.4. Accessing the controller

Controller object

By using a

Controller

object you can get access to the different domains of the robot controller, e.g. IO signals, RAPID, file system and elog messages.

To create a

Controller

object you normally make a call to the

ControllerFactory

:

VB:

Private AController As Controller

AController = ControllerFactory.CreateFrom(info As

ControllerInfo)

C#: private Controller aController; aController = ControllerFactory.CreateFrom(ControllerInfo info);

212

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

The argument is a

ControllerInfo

object, which may have been retrieved during a network scan, see

NetworkScanner on page 210

. It is also possible to add an optional

argument if the IP address of the controller or the system ID (guid) should be used.

If the PC application is supposed to work with a single controller it can be specified in an

app.config file. The default constructor can then be used to create the controller object, e.g. aController = new Controller()

. See

<defaultSystem> on page 44

for details.

If several classes in your application need to access the controller, it is recommended that they all reference the same

Controller

object. This is done either by passing the

Controller object as an argument to the constructor or by using a

Controller

property.

NOTE!

You should be aware that the .NET objects created for operations toward the robot controller will access native resources (C++ and COM code). The .NET garbage collector does not collect such objects, but these must be disposed of explicitly by the application programmer.

See

Memory management in PC applications on page 213

for further information.

Memory management in PC applications

An important feature of the .NET runtime environment is the garbage collector, which reclaims not referenced memory from the managed heap. Generally, this means that the programmer does not have to free memory that has been allocated by the use of new

. There is no way of knowing exactly when garbage collection will be performed however.

For a PC application indeterministic deallocation of resources is usually not a problem (as opposed to a FlexPendant application, which runs on a small device with limited memory).

The

IDisposable

interface, however, can be used in a PC application to obtain deterministic deallocation of resources. Using this interface you can make an explicit call to the

Dispose

method of any disposable object.

If your application is running in a Single Threaded Apartment (STA) the

Dispose

call will dispose of managed objects, but native resources (created internally by the PC SDK) will remain. To release these native objects, the method

ReleaseUnmanagedResources

should be called periodically, for example when the user presses a certain button or each time data has been written to the controller. The method call is not costly.

For an application running in a Multi Threaded Apartment (MTA) the

Dispose

call will remove both managed and native objects.

NOTE!

The method

Controller.ReleaseUnmanagedResources

should be called once in a while to avoid memory leaks in PC SDK applications running in STA.

Dispose

It is the creator of a disposable object that is responsible for its lifetime and for calling

Dispose

. A check should be done that the object still exists and any subscriptions to controller events should be removed before the

Dispose

call. This is how you dispose of a

Controller

object:

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

213

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

VB:

C#:

If Not AController Is Nothing Then

RemoveHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf

UpdateOpMode

AController.Dispose()

AController = Nothing

End If if (aController != null)

{

AController.OperatingModeChanged -= new UpdateOpMode; aController.Dispose(); aController = null;

}

Logon and logoff

Before accessing a robot controller the PC SDK application has to log on to the controller.

The

UserInfo

parameter of the

Logon

method has a

DefaultUser

property that can be used. By default all robot systems have such a user configured.

VB:

C#:

AController.Logon(UserInfo.DefaultUser) aController.Logon(UserInfo.DefaultUser);

If it is necessary for your application to handle users with different rights, these users can be configured by using the

UserAuthorizationManagement

namespace or by using the UAS administration tool in RobotStudio. This is how you create a new

UserInfo

object for login purposes.

VB:

Dim AUserInfo As UserInfo = New UserInfo("name", "password")

C#:

UserInfo aUserInfo = new UserInfo("name", "password");

214

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

NOTE!

It is necessary to log off from the controller at application shut down at the latest.

VB:

AController.LogOff()

C#: aController.LogOff();

Mastership

In order to get write access to some of the controller domains the application has to request mastership. The

Rapid

domain, i.e. tasks, programs, modules, routines and variables that exist in the robot system, is one such domain. The

Configuration

domain is another.

See

Mastership on page 41

for detailed information on this topic.

It is important to release mastership after a modification operation. One way of doing this is applying the using

statement, which results in an automatic disposal of the

Mastership object at the end of the block. Another possibility is releasing mastership in a

Finally

block, which is executed after the

Try

and

Catch

blocks. See how it can be coded in the examples

of

Start program execution on page 208

.

Controller events

The

Controller

object provides several public events, which enable you to listen to operating mode changes, controller state changes, mastership changes etc.

VB:

AddHandler AController.OperatingModeChanged, AddressOf

UpdateOpMode

AddHandler AController.StateChanged, AddressOf UpdateState

AddHandler AController.ConnectionChanged, AddressOf UpdateConn

C#:

AController.OperatingModeChanged += new UpdateOpMode;

AController.StateChanged += new UpdateState;

AController.ConnectionChanged += new UpdateConn;

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

215

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

NOTE!

Controller events use their own threads. Carefully study

Controller events and threads on page 67

to avoid threading conflicts.

NOTE!

PC SDK 5.09 and onwards uses the generic event handling introduced by .NET Framework

2.0.

CAUTION!

Do not rely on receiving an initial event when setting up/activating a controller event. There is no guarantee an event will be triggered, so you had better read the initial state from the controller.

Backup and Restore

Using the

Controller

object you can call the

Backup

method. The argument is a string describing the directory path on the controller where the backup should be stored. You can also restore a previously backed up system. This requires mastership of

Rapid

and

Configuration

and can only be done in Auto mode.

Backup sample

As the backup process is performed asynchronously you can add an event handler to receive a

BackupCompleted

event when the backup is completed. The backup directory should be created in the system backup directory, or else an exception will be thrown.

VB:

Dim BackupDir As String = "(BACKUP)$"+BackupDirName

AddHandler Me.AController.BackupCompleted, AddressOf

AController_BackupCompleted)

Me.AController.Backup(BackupDir)

C#: string backupDir = "(BACKUP)$"+backupDirName; this.aController.BackupCompleted += new

BackupEventHandler(controller_BackupCompleted); this.aController.Backup(backupDir);

Restore sample

216

The

Restore

method is synchronous, i.e. execution will not continue until the restore operation is completed.

VB:

Dim RestoreDir As String = "(BACKUP)$"+dirName

Dim M As Mastership

Try

MC = Mastership.Request(Me.AController.Configuration)

MR = Mastership.Request(Me.AController.Rapid)

Me.AController.Restore(RestoreDir, RestoreIncludes.All,

RestoreIgnores.All)

Finally

MC.Release()

MR.Release()

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

C#:

End Try string restoreDir = "(BACKUP)$"+dirName; using (Mastership mc =

Mastership.Request(this.aController.Configuration), mr =

Mastership.Request(this.aController.Rapid))

{ this.aController.Restore(restoreDir, RestoreIncludes.All,

RestoreIgnores.All);

}

VirtualPanel

You can programmatically change the operating mode of the virtual IRC5 using the

VirtualPanel

class and its

ChangeMode

method. This blocks the application thread until the user manually accepts the mode change to Auto using the Virtual FlexPendant. An alternative to blocking the application thread eternally is to add a time-out and use a

trycatch

block to catch the

TimeoutException

.

VB:

Dim vp As VirtualPanel = VirtualPanel.Attach(AController)

Try vp.ChangeMode(ControllerOperatingMode.Auto, 5000)

Catch ex As TimeoutException

Me.TextBox1.Text = "Timeout occurred at change to auto"

End Try vp.Dispose()

C#:

VirtualPanel vp = VirtualPanel.Attach(aController); try

{

} vp.ChangeMode(ControllerOperatingMode.Auto, 5000); catch (TimeoutException ex)

{ this.textBox1.Text = "Timeout occurred at change to auto";

} vp.Dispose();

There are also the asynchronous method calls

BeginChangeOperatingMode

and

EndChangeOperatingMode

. It is important to use the second method in the callback since it returns the waiting thread to the thread-pool.

VB:

Dim vp As VirtualPanel = VirtualPanel.Attach(AController) vp.BeginChangeOperatingMode(ControllerOperatingMode.Auto, New

AsyncCallback(AddressOf ChangeMode), vp)

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

217

7 Using the PC SDK

7.4. Accessing the controller

Continued

C#:

VirtualPanel vp = VirtualPanel.Attach(aController); vp.BeginChangeOperatingMode(ControllerOperatingMode.Auto, new

AsyncCallback(ChangedMode), vp);

The callback method must have the following signature and call the

EndChangeOperatingMode

as well as dispose the

VirtualPanel

.

VB:

Private Sub ChangeMode(ByVal iar As IAsyncResult)

Dim vp As VirtualPanel = DirectCast(iar.AsyncState,

VirtualPanel) vp.EndChangeOperatingMode(iar) vp.Dispose()

.....

C#: private void ChangedMode(IAsyncResult iar)

{

VirtualPanel vp = (VirtualPanel) iar.AsyncState; vp.EndChangeOperatingMode(iar); vp.Dispose();

....

Learn more

This User’s Guide only covers some of the PC SDK functionality. To get the full potential of the PC SDK you should make use of the PC SDK Reference located in the PC SDK installation directory. See

PC SDK Reference on page 201

.

You can also learn a lot by becoming an active member of the RobotStudio Community. Its

Robot Application Builder User Forum should be your number one choice when you find yourself stuck with a coding issue you cannot solve on your own. See

RobotStudio

Community on page 17

for further information.

218 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

7.5 Rapid domain

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Overview

The

RapidDomain

namespace enables access to RAPID data in the robot system. There are numerous PC SDK classes representing the different RAPID data types. There is also a

UserDefined

class used to reference RECORD structures in RAPID.

The

ValueChanged

event enables notification from the controller when persistent RAPID data has changed.

To speed up event notification from the controller there is new functionality in PC SDK 5.10, which allows you to set up subscription priorities. This possibility applies to I/O signals and persistent RAPID data. This mechanism is further described in

Implementing high priority data subscriptions on page 226

.

NOTE!

To read RAPID data you need to log on to the controller. To modify RAPID data you must also request mastership of the

Rapid

domain.

Providing the path to the RAPID data

To read or write to RAPID data you must first create a

RapidData

object. The path to the declaration of the data in the controller is passed as argument. If you don’t know the path you need to search for the RAPID data by using the

SearchRapidSymbol

functionality. See

RAPID symbol search on page 157

for further information.

Direct access

Direct access requires less memory and is faster, and is therefore recommended if you do not need to use the task and module objects afterwards.

The example below shows how to create a

RapidData

object that refers to the instance

“reg1” in the USER module.

VB:

Dim Rd As RapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData(

"T_ROB1", "USER", "reg1")

C#:

RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "USER",

"reg1");

Hierarchical access

If you need the task and module objects hierarchical access can be more efficient.

GetRapidData

exists in the Rapid, Task and Module class.

VB:

Rd = AController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1").GetModule("USER").

GetRapidData("reg1")

C#: rd = aController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1").GetModule("USER").

GetRapidData("reg1");

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

219

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

Accessing data declared in a shared module

If your application is to be used with a multi-move system (one controller and several motion tasks/robots), it may happen that the RAPID instance you need to access is declared in a -

Shared RAPID module. Such a module can be used by all tasks, T_ROB1, T_ROB2 etc.

This example shows how to create a

RapidData

object that refers to the instance “reg100”, which is declared in a shared module.

C#:

Task tRob1 = aController.Rapid.GetTask("T_ROB1"); if (tRob1 != null)

{

RapidData rData = tRob1.GetRapidData("reg100");

}

NOTE!

If the data is declared in a -Shared -Hidden module it cannot be accessed by the PC SDK.

Creating an object representing the RAPID data value

The

RapidData

object stores the path to the RAPID data. But this is not enough if you want to access its value (at least not if you want to modify it). To do that you need to create another object, which represents the value of the RAPID data.

In the

RapidDomain

namespace there are types representing the different RAPID data types.

To create the object needed to represent the RAPID data value you use the

RapidData property

Value

and cast it to the corresponding type, e.g.

Num, Bool or

Tooldata

.

This is how this is done if you want to access the value of a RAPID data of the RAPID data type bool

:

VB:

’declare a variable of data type RapidDomain.Bool

Dim rapidBool As RapidDomain.Bool

Dim rd As RapidData = Me.AController.Rapid.GetRapidData( "T_ROB1",

"MainModule", "flag" )

’test that data type is correct before cast

If TypeOf rd.Value Is RapidDomain.Bool Then rapidBool = DirectCast(rd.Value, RapidDomain.Bool)

’check if the value of the RAPID data is true

If (rapidBool.Value) Then

’ Do something...

End If

EndIf

220

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

C#:

//declare a variable of data type RapidDomain.Bool

RapidDomain.Bool rapidBool;

RapidDomain.RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "MainModule",

"flag");

//test that data type is correct before cast if (rd.Value is ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.Bool)

{ rapidBool =

(ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.Bool)rd.Value;

//assign the value of the RAPID data to a local variable bool boolValue = rapidBool.Value;

}

If you just want to read this variable you can use this technique instead of creating a

RapidDomain.

Bool

object:

VB:

Dim b As Boolean = Convert.ToBoolean(rd.Value.ToString)

C#: bool b = Convert.ToBoolean(rd.Value.ToString());

The .NET type

ToolData

(representing the RAPID data type tooldata)

can be created like this:

VB:

Dim ATool As ToolData

If Rd.Value Is ToolData Then

ATool = DirectCast(Rd.Value, ToolData)

End If

C#:

ToolData aTool; if (rd.Value is ToolData)

{ aTool = (ToolData) rd.Value;

}

IRapidData.ToString method

All RapidDomain structures representing RAPID data types implement the

IRapidData interface. It has a

ToString

method, which returns the value of the RAPID data in the form of a string. This is a simple example: string boolValue = rapidBool.ToString();

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

221

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

The string is formatted according to the principle described in

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 222

.

Below is an example of a more complex data type. The

ToolData Tframe

property is of type

Pose

. Its

Trans

value is displayed in a label in the format [x, y, z].

VB:

Me.Label1.Text = ATool.Tframe.Trans.ToString()

C#: this.label1.Text = aTool.Tframe.Trans.ToString();

IRapidData.FillFromString method

The

IRapidData

interface also has a

FillFromString

method, which fills the object with a valid RAPID string representation. The method can always be used when you need to modify RAPID data. Using the method with the

RapidDomain.Bool

variable used earlier in the chapter will look like this: rapidBool.FillFromString("True")

Using it for a

RapidDomain.Num

variable is similar: rapidNum.FillFromString("10")

String format

222

The format is constructed recursively. An example is the easiest way of illustrating this.

Example:

The

RapidDomain.Pose

structure represents the RAPID data type pose

, which describes how a coordinate system is displaced and rotated around another coordinate system.

public struct Pose : IRapidData

{ public Pos trans; public Orient rot;

}

This is an example in RAPID:

VAR pose frame1;

...

frame1.trans := [50, 0, 40]; frame1.rot := [1, 0, 0, 0];

The frame1 coordinate transformation is assigned a value that corresponds to a displacement in position where X=50 mm, Y=0 mm and Z=40 mm. There is no rotation.

The

RapidDomain.Pose

structure consists of two struct variables called trans and rot of the data types

Pos

and

Orient

.

Pos

has three floats and

Orient

consists of four doubles. The

FillFromString

format for a

Pose

object is “[[1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0][10.0, 20.0, 30.0]]”.

The example shows how to write a new value to a RAPID pose

variable:

VB:

If TypeOf rd.Value Is Pose Then

Dim rapidPose As Pose = DirectCast(rd.Value, Pose) rapidPose.FillFromString("[[1.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0][10, 20, 30]]") rd.Value = rapidPose

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

C#:

End If if (rd.Value is Pose)

{

Pose rapidPose = (Pose) rd.Value; rapidPose.FillFromString("[[1.0, 0.5, 0.0, 0.0][10, 15, 10]]"); rd.Value = rapidPose;

}

NOTE!

The string format must be carefully observed. If the string argument has the wrong format, a

RapidDataFormatException

is thrown.

Writing to RAPID data

Writing to RAPID data is only possible using the type cast

RapidData

value, to which the new value is assigned. To write the new value to the RAPID data in the controller you must then assign the .Net object to the

Value

property of the

RapidData

object. This example uses the rapidBool object created in

Creating an object representing the RAPID data value on page 220

.

VB:

’Assign new value to .Net variable rapidBool.Value = False

’Request mastership of Rapid before writing to the controller

Me.master = Mastership.Request(Me.AController.Rapid)

’Write the new value to the data in the controller rd.Value = rapidBool

’Release mastership as soon as possible

Me.master.Dispose

C#:

//Assign new value to .Net variable rapidBool.Value = false;

//Request mastership of Rapid before writing to the controller this.master = Mastership.Request(this.controller.Rapid); rd.Value = rapidBool;

//Release mastership as soon as possible this.master.Dispose();

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

223

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

See

Mastership on page 41

for detailed information about on how the controller handles write

access and

Start program execution on page 208

for another code example of implementing

mastership in a PC SDK application.

This was an easy example, as the value to change was a simple bool

. Often, however, RAPID uses complex structures. By using the

FillFromString

method you can assign a new

Value

to any

RapidData

and write it to the controller.

The string must be formatted according to the principle described in the previous section. The following example shows how to write a new value to the pos

structure (x, y, z) of a RAPID tooldata:

VB:

Dim APos As Pos = New Pos

APos.FillFromString("[2,3,3]")

Me.ATool.Tframe.Trans = APos

Me.Rd.Value = Me.ATool

C#:

Pos aPos = new Pos(); aPos.FillFromString("[2,3,3]"); this.aTool.Tframe.Trans = aPos; this.rd.Value = this.aTool;

NOTE!

The new value is not written to the controller until the last statement is executed.

Letting the user know that RAPID data has changed

In order to be notified that RAPID data has changed you need to add a subscription to the

ValueChanged

event of the

RapidData

instance. Note, however, that this only works for

persistent RAPID data.

Add subscription

This is how you add a subscription to the

ValueChanged

event:

VB:

C#:

Addhandler Rd.ValueChanged, AddressOf Rd_ValueChanged this.rd.ValueChanged += rd_ValueChanged;

224

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

Handle event

The implementation of the event handler may look like this. Remember that controller events use their own threads, and avoid Winforms threading problems by the use of

Control.Invoke

, which forces the execution from the background thread to the GUI thread.

VB:

Private Sub Rd_ValueChanged(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

DataValueChangedEventArgs)

Me.Invoke(New EventHandler (AddressOf UpdateGUI), sender, e)

End Sub

C# private void rd_ValueChanged(object sender,

DataValueChangedEventArgs e)

{ this.Invoke(new EventHandler (UpdateGUI), sender, e);

}

See

Controller events and threads on page 67

to learn more about potential threading conflicts in RAB applications.

Read new value from controlller

Update the user interface with the new value. As the value is not part of the event argument, you must use the

RapidData Value

property to retrieve the new value:

VB:

Private Sub UpdateGUI(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs)

Dim Tool1 As ToolData = DirectCast(Me.Rd.Value, ToolData)

Me.Label1.Text = Tool1.Tframe.Trans.ToString()

End Sub

C# private void UpdateGUI(object sender, System.EventArgs e)

{

ToolData tool1= (ToolData)this.rd.Value; this.label1.Text = tool1.Tframe.Trans.ToString();

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

225

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.1. Working with RAPID data

Continued

NOTE!

Subscriptions work only for RAPID data declared as PERS.

Implementing high priority data subscriptions

To speed up event notification from the controller it is possible to set up subscription priorities for persistent RAPID data. To do this you use the

Subscribe

method and the enumeration

EventPriority

as argument. The example shows an ordinary signal subscription and a subscription with high priority:

VB:

Addhandler Rd.ValueChanged, AddressOf Rd_ValueChanged

Rd.Subscribe(AddressOf Rd_Changed, EventPriority.High)

C#: rd.ValueChanged += rd_ValueChanged; rd.Subscribe(rd_Changed, EventPriority.High);

To deactivate subscriptions with high priority you call the

Unsubscribe

method like this:

VB:

C#:

Rd.Unsubscribe(AddressOf Rd_ValueChanged) rd.Unsubscribe(rd_Changed);

NOTE!

High priority subscriptions can be used for I/O signals and RAPID data declared PERS. The controller can handle 64 high priority subscriptions.

RapidData disposal

You are recommended to dispose of

RapidData

objects when they are no longer needed. See

Memory management in PC applications on page 213

for further information.

VB:

If Not Rd Is Nothing Then

Rd.Dispose()

Rd = Nothing

End If

C#: if (rd != null)

{ rd.Dispose(); rd = null;

}

226 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.2. Handling arrays

7.5.2. Handling arrays

Overview

In RAPID you can have up to three dimensional arrays. These are accessible by using a

RapidData

object like for any other RAPID data.

There are mainly two ways of accessing each individual element of an array: by indexers or by an enumerator.

ArrayData object

If the

RapidData references a RAPID array is

Value

property returns an object of

ArrayData

type. Before making a cast, check the type using the is

operator or by using the

IsArray

property on the

RapidData

object.

VB:

Dim RD As RapidData = AController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1",

"User", "string_array")

If RD.IsArray Then

Dim AD As ArrayData = DirectCast( RD.Value,ArrayData)

.....

End If

C#:

RapidData rd = aController.Rapid.GetRapidData("T_ROB1", "User",

"string_array"); if (rd.IsArray)

{

ArrayData ad = (ArrayData)rd.Value;

.....

}

Array dimensions

The dimension of the array is returned by the Rank property. If you need to check the length of the individual arrays you can use the

GetLength

method on the

ArrayData

object passing the dimension index as argument.

VB:

Dim ARank As Integer = AD.Rank

Dim Len As Integer = AD.GetLength(ARank)

C#: int aRank = ad.Rank; int len = ad.GetLength(aRank);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

227

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.2. Handling arrays

Continued

Array item access by using indexers

By the use of indexers you can access each array element, even in three dimensional arrays.

A combination of the

GetLength

method and

For

loops makes it possible to access any item:

VB:

Dim ASum As Double = 0R

Dim ANum As Num

If AD.Rank = 1 Then

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.Length

ANum = DirectCast(ad.[I], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

ElseIf AD.Rank = 2 Then

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(1)

For J As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(2)

ANum = DirectCast(ad[I, J], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

Next

Else

For I As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(1)

For J As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(2)

For K As Integer = 1 To AD.GetLength(3)

ANum = DirectCast(ad[I, J, K], Num)

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next

Next

Next

End If

228

C#: double sum = 0d;

Num aNum; if (ad.Rank == 1) { for (int i = 1; i <= ad.Length; i++) { aNum = (Num)ad.[i]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

} elseif (ad.Rank == 2) { for(int i = 1; i< ad.GetLength(1); i++) { for (int j = 1; j <= ad.Length; j++) { aNum = (Num)ad.[i,j]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

}

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.2. Handling arrays

Continued

} else { for(int i = 1; i< ad.GetLength(1); i++) { for(int j = 1; j< ad.GetLength(2); j++) { for (int k = 1; k <= ad.GetLength(3); k++) { aNum = (Num)ad.[i, j, k]; aSum += (double)ANum;

}

}

}

}

Array item access using enumerator

You can also use the enumerator operation ( foreach

) like it is used by collections in .NET.

Notice that it can be used for both one dimension and multi-dimensional arrays to access each individual element. The previous example is a lot simpler this way:

VB:

C#:

Dim ASum As Double = 0R

Dim ANum As Num

For Each ANum As Num In AD

ASum += DirectCast(ANum, Double)

Next double sum = 0d;

Num aNum; foreach(Num aNum in ad)

{ aSum += (double)ANum;

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 229

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.3. ReadItem and WriteItem methods

7.5.3. ReadItem and WriteItem methods

Overview

An alternative way of accessing RAPID data stored in an array are the

ReadItem

and

WriteItem

methods.

ReadItem method

Using the

ReadItem

method you can directly access a

RapidData

item in an array, e.g. an array with RobTargets or Nums. The index to the item is explicitly specified in the

ReadItem call. The first item is in position 1, i.e. the array is 1-based as in RAPID.

VB:

Dim ANum As Num aNum = DirectCast(rd.ReadItem(1, 2), Num)

C#:

Num aNum = (Num)rd.ReadItem(1, 2);

This example retrieves the second Num value in the first array of the RAPID data variable referenced by rd.

WriteItem method

In the same manner it is possible to use the

WriteItem

method to write to an individual

RAPID data item in an array. This example shows how to write the result of an individual robot operation into an array representing a total robot program with several operations:

VB:

Dim ANum As Num = New Num(OPERATION_OK) rd.WriteItem(ANum, 1, 2)

C#:

Num aNum = new Num(OPERATION_OK); rd.WriteItem(aNum, 1, 2);

NOTE!

If the index is out of bounds an

IndexOutOfRangeException

will be thrown.

230 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Overview

RECORD structures are common in RAPID code. To handle these unique data types a

UserDefined

class is available. This class has properties and methods to handle individual components of a RECORD.

In some cases implementing your own structure can improve application design and code maintenance.

Creating UserDefined object

The

UserDefined

constructor takes a

RapidDataType

object as argument. To retrieve a

RapidDataType

object you need to provide a

RapidSymbol

or the path to the declaration of the RAPID data type.

This example creates a

UserDefined

object representing the RAPID RECORD

processdata:

VB:

Dim rdt As RapidDataType rdt = Me.controller.Rapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1", "MyModule",

"processdata")

Dim processdata As UserDefined = New UserDefined(rdt)

C#

RapidDataType rdt; rdt = this.controller.Rapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata");

UserDefined processdata = new UserDefined(rdt);

Reading UserDefined data

UserDefined

can be used to read any kind of RECORD variable from the controller. The individual components of the RECORD are accessible using the

Components

property and an index. Each

Component

can be read as a string.

VB:

C#:

Dim processdata As UserDefined = DirectCast(rd.Value, UserDefined)

Dim No1 As String = processdata.Components(0).ToString()

Dim No2 AS String = processdata.Components(1),ToString()

UserDefined processdata = (UserDefined) rd.Value; string no1 = processdata.Components[0].ToString(); string no2 = processdata.Components[1].ToString();

Each individual string can then be used in a

FillFromString

method to convert the component into a specific data type, e.g.

RobTarget

or

ToolData

. See

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 222

for details.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

231

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

Writing to UserDefined data

If you want to modify

UserDefined

data and write it to the controller you must first read the

UserDefined

object and the apply new values using the

FillFromString

method. Then you need to perform a write operation using the

RapidData.Value

property.

VB: processdata.Components(0).FillFromString("[0,0,0]") processdata.Components(1).FillFromString("10") rd.Value = ud

C#: processdata.Components[0].FillFromString("[0,0,0]"); processdata.Components[1].FillFromString("10"); rd.Value = ud;

See

IRapidData.FillFromString method on page 222

and

Writing to RAPID data on page 223

for further information and code samples.

Recursively reading the structure of any RECORD data type

If you need to know the structure of a RECORD data type (built-in or user-defined) you must first retrieve the record components of the record. Then you need to iterate the record components and check if any of them are also records. This procedure must be repeated until all record components are atomic types.This code example shows how to get information about the robtarget data type. The robtarget URL is “RAPID/robtarget” or just “robtarget”.

private void SearchRobtarget()

{

RapidSymbol[ ] rsCol = tRob1.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "RAPID/ robtarget", "p10");

RapidDataType theDataType; if (rsCol.Length > 0)

{

Console.WriteLine("RapidSymbol name = " + rsCol[0].Name); theDataType = RapidDataType.GetDataType(rsCol[0]);

Console.WriteLine("DataType = " + theDataType.Name); if (theDataType.IsRecord)

{

RapidSymbol[] syms = theDataType.GetComponents();

SearchSymbolStructure(syms);

}

}

}

232

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

private void SearchSymbolStructure(RapidSymbol[] rsCol)

{

RapidDataType theDataType; foreach (RapidSymbol rs in rsCol)

{

Console.WriteLine("RapidSymbol name = " + rs.Name); theDataType = RapidDataType.GetDataType(rs);

Console.WriteLine("DataType = " + theDataType.Name); if (theDataType.IsRecord)

{

RapidSymbol[] syms = theDataType.GetComponents();

SearchSymbolStructure(syms);

}

}

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

233

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

234

The code example above produces the following printout:

RapidSymbol name = p10

DataType = robtarget

RapidSymbol name = trans

DataType = pos

RapidSymbol name = x

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = y

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = z

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = rot

DataType = orient

RapidSymbol name = q1

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = q2

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = q3

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = q4

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = robconf

DataType = confdata

RapidSymbol name = cf1

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = cf4

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = cf6

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = cfx

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = extax

DataType = extjoint

RapidSymbol name = eax_a

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = eax_b

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = eax_c

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = eax_d

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = eax_e

DataType = num

RapidSymbol name = eax_f

DataType = num

Implement your own struct representing a RECORD

This example shows how you can create your own .NET data type representing a RECORD in the controller instead of using the

UsefDefined

type.

Creating ProcessData type

VB:

Dim rdt As RapidDataType = Me.ARapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata")

Dim pc As ProcessData = New ProcessData(rdt) pc.FillFromString(rd.Value.ToString())

C#

RapidDataType rdt = this.aRapid.GetRapidDataType("T_ROB1",

"MyModule", "processdata");

ProcessData pc = new ProcessData(rdt); pc.FillFromString(rd.Value.ToString());

Implementing ProcessData struct

This example shows how the new data type

ProcessData

may be implemented. As you see, this is done by using a .NET struct and letting

ProcessData

wrap the

UserDefined

object.

The struct implementation should include a

FillFromString

and

ToString

method, i.e. inherit the

IRapidData

interface. Any properties and methods may also be implemented.

VB:

Public Structure ProcessData

Implements IRapidData

Private data As UserDefined

Public Sub New(ByVal rdt As RapidDataType) data = New UserDefined(rdt)

End Sub

Private Property IntData() As UserDefined

Get

Return data

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

235

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

End Get

Set(ByVal Value As UserDefined) data = Value

End Set

End Property

.....

End Structure

C#: public struct ProcessData: IRapidData

{ private UserDefined data; public ProcessData(RapidDataType rdt)

{ data = new UserDefined(rdt);

} private UserDefined IntData

{ get { return data; } set { data = value; }

} public int StepOne

{ get

{ int res =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components[0].ToString())

; return res;

} set

{

IntData.Components[0] = new Num(value);

}

}

}

Implementing IRapidData methods

This piece of code shows how the two

IRapidData

methods

ToString

and

FillFromString

can be implemented.

VB:

Public Sub FillFromString(ByVal newValue As String) Implements

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.IRapidData.FillFromStr

ing

IntData.FillFromString(newValue)

236

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

End Sub

Public Overrides Function ToString() As String Implements

ABB.Robotics.Controllers.RapidDomain.IRapidData.ToString

Return IntData.ToString()

End Function

C#: public void FillFromString(string newValue)

{

IntData.FillFromString(newValue);

} public override string ToString()

{ return IntData.ToString();

}

NOTE! The

ToString

method has to use the

Overrides

keyword in Visual Basic and the override

keyword in C#.

Property implementation

Each item in the RECORD structure should have a corresponding property in the extended

.NET data type. The get and set methods have to implement the conversion from/to controller data type to .NET data type.

VB:

Public Property Step() As Integer

Get

Dim res As Integer =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components(0).ToString())

Return res

End Get

Set(ByVal Value As Integer)

Dim tmp As Num = New Num tmp.FillFromNum(Value)

IntData.Components(0) = tmp

End Set

End Property

C#: public int Step

{ get

{ int res =

Convert.ToInt32(IntData.Components[0].ToString()); return res;

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

237

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.4. UserDefined data

Continued

}

} set

{

Num tmp = new Num(); tmp.FillFromNum(value);

IntData.Components[0] = tmp;

}

238 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Overview

Most RAPID elements (variables, modules, tasks, records etc.) are members of a symbol table, in which their names are stored as part of a program tree structure.

It is possible to search this table and get a collection of

RapidSymbol

objects, each one including the RAPID object name, location and type.

Search method

The search must be configured carefully, due to the large amount of RAPID symbols in a system. To define a query you need to consider from where in the program tree the search should be performed, which symbols are of interest and what information you need for the symbols of interest.To enable search from different levels the

SearchRapidSymbol

method is a member of several different SDK classes, e.g.

Task

,

Module

and

Routine

. This example shows a search performed with

Task

as the starting point:

VB:

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "num", string.Empty)

C#:

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "num", string.Empty);

The

SearchRapidSymbol

method has three arguments. The first argument, of data type

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

, is detailed in the next section. The second and third arguments are detailed in the following sections.

Search properties

The

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

type is rather complex and requires some knowledge about RAPID concepts.

It is used to specify search method, type of RAPID symbol to search for, whether the search should be recursive, whether the symbols are local and/or global and whether or not the search result should include only symbols currently used by a program. If a property is not valid for a particular symbol, it will be discarded and will not exclude the symbol from the search result.

The table describes the different properties of

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

.

Property Description

SearchMethod Specifies the direction of the search, which can be

Block

(down) or

Scope

(up). Example: If the starting point of the search is a routine, a block-search will return the symbols declared within the routine, whereas a scope-search will return the symbols accessible from the routine.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

239

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Property

Types

Recursive

GlobalSymbols

LocalSymbols

InUse

Description

Specifies which RAPID type(s) you want to search for. The

SymbolTypes

enumeration includes

Constant

,

Variable

,

Persistent

,

Function

,

Procedure

,

Trap

,

Module

,

Task

,

Routine

,

RapidData

. etc. (

Routine

includes

Function

,

Procedure

and

Trap. RapidData

includes

Constant

,

Variable

and

Persistent

.)

For both block and scope search it is possible to choose if the search should stop at the next scope or block level or recursively continue until the root (or leaf) of the symbol table tree is reached.

Specifies whether global symbols should be included.

Specifies whether local symbols should be included.

Specifies whether only symbols in use by the loaded RAPID program should be searched.

Default instance

RapidSymbolSearchProperties

has several static methods that return a default instance.

VB:

C#:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault();

The default instance has the following values:.

Property Description

SearchMethod

Types

Recursive

GlobalSymbols

LocalSymbols

InUse

SymbolSearchMethod.Block

SymbolTypes.NoSymbol

True

True

True

True

Using this instance you can specify the search properties of the search you want to perform.

Example:

VB:

SProp.SearchMethod = SymbolSearchMethod.Scope

SProp.Types = SymbolTypes.Constant Or SymbolTypes.Persistent

SProp.Recursive = False

240

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

C#: sProp.SearchMethod = SymbolSearchMethod.Scope; sProp.Types = SymbolTypes.Constant | SymbolTypes.Persistent

sProp.Recursive = false;

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

241

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

NOTE!

The default instance has the property

Types

set to

NoSymbol.

It must be specified in order for a meaningful search to be performed!

NOTE!

The

Types

property allows you to combine several types in a search. See the example above.

NOTE!

See PC SDK Reference for the static methods

CreateDefaultForData

and

CreateDefaultForRoutine

.

Data type argument

The second argument of the

SearchRapidSymbol

method is the RAPID data type written as a string. The data type should be written with small letters, e.g. “num”, “string” or

“robtarget”. It can also be specified as string.Empty

.

NOTE!

To search for a

UserDefined

data type the complete path to the module that holds the

RECORD definition must be passed, like this: result = tRob1.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp,"RAPID/T_ROB1/MyModule/

MyDataType", string.Empty);

However, if

MyModule

is configured as -Shared the system sees its data types as installed, and the task or module should not be included in the path result = tRob1.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp,"MyDataType", string.Empty);

Symbol name argument

The third argument is the name of the RAPID symbol. It can be specified as string.Empty

if the name of the symbol to retrieve is not known, or if the purpose is to search ALL “num” data in the system for example.

Instead of the name of the RAPID symbol a regular expression can be used. The search mechanism will then match the pattern of the regular expression with the symbols in the symbol table. The regular expression string is not case sensitive

A regular expression is a powerful mechanism. It may consist of ordinary characters and meta characters. A meta character is an operator used to represent one or several ordinary characters, and the purpose is to extend the search.

Within a regular expression, all alphanumeric characters match themselves, i.e. the pattern

“abc” will only match a symbol named “abc”. To match all symbol names containing the character sequence “abc”, it is necessary to add some meta characters. The regular expression for this is “.*abc.*”.

The available meta character set is shown below:

.

Expression Meaning

Any single character

242

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Expression

^

[s]

[^s] r* r+ r?

(r) r | r’

.*

Meaning

Any symbol starting with

Any single character in the non-empty set s, where s is a sequence of characters. Ranges may be specified as c-c.

Any single character not in the set s.

Zero or more occurrences of the regular expression r.

One or more occurrences of the regular expression r.

Zero or one occurrence of the regular expression r.

The regular expression r. Used for separate that regular expression from another.

The regular expressions r or r’.

Any character sequence (zero, one or several characters).

Example 1

"^c.*"

Returns all symbols starting with c or C.

Example 2

"^reg[1-3]"

Returns reg1, Reg1, REG1, reg2, Reg2, REG2, reg3, Reg3 and REG3.

Example 3

"^c.*|^reg[1,2]"

Returns all symbols starting with c or C as well as reg1, Reg1, REG1, reg2, Reg2 and REG2.

SearchRapidSymbol example

This example searches for VAR, PERS or CONST num data in a task and its modules. The search is limited to globally declared symbols. By default the search method is

Block

, so it does not have to be set.

VB:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

SProp.Types = SymbolTypes.RapidData

SProp.LocalSymbols = False

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "num", string.Empty)

C#:

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault(); sProp.Types = SymbolTypes.RapidData; sProp.LocalSymbols = false;

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "num", string.Empty);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

243

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.5. RAPID symbol search

Continued

Search for UserDefined RAPID data - example

In this example a user defined RECORD data type (“mydata”) is declared in a module

(“myModule”). Assuming that the end-user can declare and use data of this data type in any program module, the search method must be Block (default). A search for all “mydata” instances may look like this:

VB:

C#:

Dim SProp As RapidSymbolSearchProperties =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault()

SProp.Types = SymbolTypes.RapidData

Dim RSCol As RapidSymbol()

RSCol = ATask.SearchRapidSymbol(SProp, "RAPID/T_ROB1/myModule/ mydata", string.Empty)

RapidSymbolSearchProperties sProp =

RapidSymbolSearchProperties.CreateDefault(); sProp.Types = SymbolTypes.RapidData;

RapidSymbol[] rsCol; rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "RAPID/T_ROB1/myModule/ mydata", string.Empty);

NOTE!

If myModule is configured as -Shared and all myData instances are declared in myModule the search method must be set to

Scope

and the

SearchRapidSymbol

call should look like this: rsCol = aTask.SearchRapidSymbol(sProp, "mydata", string.Empty);

244 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.6. Working with RAPID modules and programs

7.5.6. Working with RAPID modules and programs

Overview

Using the

Task

object it is possible to load and save individual modules and programs. You can also unload programs, as well as reset the program pointer and start program execution.

NOTE!

All these operations require mastership of the RAPID domain. See

Mastership on page 215

for details.

Load modules and programs

To load a module or program file you need the path to the file on the controller. When the file is loaded into memory the

RapidLoadMode

enumeration argument,

Add

or

Replace,specifies whether or not it should replace old modules or programs.

If the file extension is not a valid module (mod or sys) or program (pgf) extension an

ArgumentException

is thrown.

VB:

Try

ATask.LoadProgramFromFile(APrgFileName, RapidLoadMode.Replace)

ATask.LoadModuleFromFile(AModFileName, RapidLoadMode.Add)

Catch ex As ArgumentException

Return

End Try

C#: try

{ aTask.LoadProgramFromFile(aPrgFileName, RapidLoadMode.Replace); aTask.LoadModuleFromFile(aModFileName, RapidLoadMode.Add);

} catch (ArgumentException ex)

{ return;

}

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

245

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.6. Working with RAPID modules and programs

Continued

NOTE!

All program files must reside in the file system of the controller and not locally on the PC. In order to load a program from the PC you must first download it to the controller by using the

FileSystem.PutFile

method. See

Saving files on page 265

for details.

NOTE!

If the User Authorization System of the controller is used by the PC SDK application, it is required that the logged on user has the UAS grant UAS_RAPID_LOADPROGRAM to load and unload RAPID programs. See the PC SDK Reference for further information about which grants are necessary for a specific PC SDK method.

Save programs and modules

You can save programs using the

Task.SaveProgramToFile

method and a single module by using the

Module.SaveToFile

method.

To unload a program after it has been saved to file you call

DeleteProgram()

.

VB:

Dim TaskCol As Task() = AController.Rapid.GetTasks()

Dim AnObject As Object

For Each AnObject in TaskCol

ATask = DirectCast(AnObject, Task)

ATask.ProgramName = ATask.Name

ATask.SaveProgramToFile(SaveDir)

ATask.DeleteProgram()

Next

C#:

Task[] taskCol = aController.Rapid.GetTasks(); foreach (Task aTask in taskCol)

{ aTask.ProgramName = aTask.Name; aTask.SaveProgramToFile(saveDir); aTask.DeleteProgram();

}

In this example a module is saved to file:

VB:

AModule.SaveToFile(AFilePath)

C# aModule.SaveToFile(aFilePath);

ResetProgramPointer method

Using

ResetProgramPointer

you can set the program pointer to the main entry point of the task.

VB:

ATask.ResetProgramPointer()

246

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.6. Working with RAPID modules and programs

Continued

C#: aTask.ResetProgramPointer();

Start program

Starting program execution in the robot controller can only be done in automatic operating mode. There are several overloaded

Start

methods to use, the simplest way to start RAPID execution of a controller task is:

VB:

ATask.Start()

C#: aTask.Start();

NOTE!

If your application uses the User Authorization System of the controller (see

User

Authorization System on page 70

) you should also check that the current user has the grant

UAS_RAPID_EXECUTE before calling the

Start

method.

Execution change event

It is possible to subscribe to events that occur when a RAPID program starts and stops. It is done like this:

VB:

AddHandler AController.Rapid.ExecutionStatusChanged, AddressOf

UpdateUI

C# aController.Rapid.ExecutionStatusChanged += UpdateUI;

See

Avoiding threading conflicts on page 259

and

Letting the user know that RAPID data has changed on page 224

for information about how to write the event handler that is needed to update the GUI due to a controller event.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 247

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Remote operator dialog

RAB 5.12 supports operator dialogs to be launched on a PC instead of the FlexPendant when

RAPID UI- and TP-instructions are executed. In this chapter this new feature is referred to as

Remote operator dialog. It enables an operator to give the feedback required by the RAPID program from a PC instead of using the FlexPendant.

NOTE!

Remote operator dialog can only be used with RobotWare 5.12 and later.

Supported RAPID instructions

The following RAPID instructions are supported:

•

UIAlphaEntry

• UIListView

•

UIMessageBox

• UIMsgBox

•

UINumEntry

• UINumTune

•

TPErase

• TPReadFK

•

TPReadNum

• TPWrite

UIInstructionType

The PC SDK

UIInstructionType

enumeration defines the different RAPID instructions listed above. For a description of each instruction type, see PC SDK Reference. Below is an example of such a description.

Example

UIInstructionType.UIAlphaEntry

:

Member Description

UIAlphaEntry The UIAlphaEntry (User Interaction Alpha Entry) is used to let an operator communicate with the robot system via RAPID, by enabling him to enter a string from the FlexPendant or from a

PC SDK application. After the operator has entered the text, it is transferred back to the RAPID program by calling UIAlphaEntryEventArgs.SendAnswer.

248

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Continued

TIP!

For complete information about the usage in RAPID refer to RAPID Technical reference

manual (easily accessed from within RobotStudio for example).

Increased flexibility

Making use of the Remote operator dialog feature, the end-user of the robot system can choose whether to use the FlexPendant or the PC SDK application to answer a RAPID UI- or

TP-instruction.

The FlexPendant will always show the operator dialog the usual way. If the operator responds from the PC the message on the FlexPendant will disappear.

NOTE!

Likewise, the dialog of the PC SDK application should disappear if the operator chooses to respond from the FlexPendant. This is handled by the PC SDK programmer.

Basic approach

The basic procedure for implementing Remote operator dialog in a PC SDK application is shown below. The same approach is used internally by the FlexPendant when it launches its operator view.

Step Action

1

2

3

4

Set up a subscription to

UIInstructionEvent

.

In the event handler check the

UIInstructionEventType

from the event arguments. If

Post

or

Send

create an operator dialog by using the information provided by the event arguments.

To transfer the response of the end-user to the RAPID program call the

SendAnswer

method of the specialized

UIInstructionEventArgs

object.

Remove any existing operator dialog if you get a

UIInstructionEvent of

UIInstructionEventType.Abort

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

249

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Continued

NOTE!

Remember that controller events are always received on a background thread and that you need to enforce execution to the GUI thread by the use of

Invoke

before launching the operator dialog. See

Controller events and threads on page 67

for details.

UIInstructionEvent

To be notified when a UI-instruction event has occurred in the controller, you need to set up a subscription to

UIInstructionEvent

. To do that you use the

UIInstruction

property of the

Rapid

class, like this:

Controller c = new Controller(); c.Rapid.UIInstruction.UIInstructionEvent += OnUIInstructionEvent;

TIP!

For a code example including an event handler see UIInstructionEvent in the PC SDK

Reference.

UIInstruction event arguments

To create the dialog in accordance with the arguments of the RAPID instruction and to transfer the response of the operator back to the executing RAPID program, you use the information of the event arguments.

UIInstructionEventArgs

The

UIInstructionEventArgs object holds information about which RAPID task and which UI- or TP-instruction triggered the event. The picture below shows all

UIInstructionEventArgs

members.

250

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Continued

7.5.7_1

UIInstructionEventArgs

is a base class of several specialized classes, one for each UI- and TP- instruction. The specialized class holds the additional information needed to create the operator dialog, so type casting the

UIInstructionEventArgs object to the correct specialized type is necessary. To do that you first check the

InstructionType

property, which you can see in the picture above.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

251

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Continued

UIListViewEventArgs

As an example of a specialized type, the members of the

UIListViewEventArgs

class are shown below. The

Buttons

and

ListItems

properties are of course crucial for creating the operator dialog.

7.5.7_2

UIInstructionEventType

An important property in the picture above is

UIInstructionEventType

. It is inherited from the base class and comes with all UI- and TP- instruction events.

The table shows the members of the

UIInstructionEventType

enumeration.

Member Description

Undefined Undefined. Should not occur.

Post Post event type, e.g. TPWrite, TPErase. When the event is of this type RAPID expects no response from the operator.

252

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.5.7. Enable operator response to RAPID UI-instructions from a PC

Continued

Member

Send

Abort

Description

Send event type, e.g. TPReadNum, UIListView. When the event is of this type the running RAPID program expects feedback from the operator before execution continuous.

When the controller gets a response from a client (the FlexPendant or a PC

SDK application) it sends an event of

Abort

type. This tells all subscribing clients that the UI-Instruction has been aborted, closed or confirmed by the operator. When you get an event of this type you should remove any open operator dialog.

NOTE!

If the robot system has several RAPID tasks it is of course necessary to keep track of which operator dialog belongs to which task etc.

A RAPID task can only handle ONE pending

Send

, and it is not guaranteed that an

Abort event will always follow a

Send

event. Therefore, if you receive a new

Send

event from the same task without a preceding

Abort event, you should remove the existing dialog and display the new one.

SendAnswer method

To transfer the response of the end-user back to the RAPID program you call the

SendAnswer

method. See the picture of the

UIListViewEventArgs

class above.

SendAnswer

is called with different arguments depending on the RAPID instruction.

For example, if it is a

UIAlphaEntry

instruction you just send the string that the operator has entered as argument. But if it is a

UIListView

instruction the

SendAnswer

method will look like this: public void SendAnswer(int listItemIdx, UIButtonResult btnRes);

NOTE!

There is no mastership handling involved in using Remote operator dialog.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 253

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

7.6. IO system domain

Overview

A robot system uses input and output signals to control processes. Signals can be of digital, analog or group signal type. Such IO signals are accessible using the SDK.

Signal changes in the robot system are often significant, and there are many scenarios where end-users of the system need notification of signal changes.

To speed up event notification from the controller there is new functionality in PC SDK 5.10, which allows you to set up subscription priorities. This possibility applies to I/O signals and

persistent RAPID data. This mechanism is further described in

Implementing high priority event subscription on page 258

.

Accessing signals

Accessing signals is done through the

Controller

object and its property

IOSystem

, which represents the IO signal space in the robot controller.

To access a signal you need the system name of the signal. The object that is returned from the

IOSystem

.

GetSignal

method is of type

Signal

.

VB:

Dim Signal1 As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("signal name")

C#:

Signal signal1 = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("signal name");

The returned

Signal

object has to be typecast to digital, analog or group signal. This example shows a how a signal of type

DigitalSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim DISig As DigitalSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, DigitalSignal)

C#:

DigitalSignal diSig = (DigitalSignal) signal1;

This example shows a how an

AnalogSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim AISig As AnalogSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, AnalogSignal)

C#:

AnalogSignal aiSig = (AnalogSignal) signal1;

This example shows a how a

GroupSignal

is created:

VB:

Dim GISig As GroupSignal = DirectCast(Signal1, GroupSignal)

C#:

GroupSignal giSig = (GroupSignal) signal1;

254

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

NOTE!

Remember to call the

Dispose

method of the signal when it should no longer be used.

Getting signals using SignalFilter

Instead of just getting one signal at a time you can get a signal collection using a signal filter.

Some of the

SignalFilter

flags are mutually exclusive, e.g.

SignalFilter.Analog

and

SignalFilter.Digital

. Others are inclusive, e.g.

SignalFilter.Digital

and

SignalFilter.Input

. You can combine the filter flags using the “|” character in C# and the

Or

operator in VB:

VB:

C#:

Dim ASigFilter As SignalFilter = SignalFilter.Digital Or

SignalFilter.Input

Dim Signals As SignalCollection =

AController.IOSystem.GetSignals(ASigFilter)

SignalFilter aSigFilter = SignalFilter.Digital |

SignalFilter.Input;

SignalCollection signals = aController.IOSystem.GetSignals(aSigFilter);

This piece of code iterates the signal collection and adds all signals to a

ListView

control.

The list has three columns displaying signal name, type and value:

VB:

For Each ASignal As Signal In Signals

Item = New ListViewItem(ASignal.Name)

Item.SubItems.Add(ASignal.Type.ToString())

Item.SubItems.Add(ASignal.Value.ToString())

Me.ListView1.Items.Add(Item)

Next

C#: foreach(Signal signal in signals)

{ item = new ListViewItem(signal.Name); item.SubItems.Add(signal.Type.ToString()); item.SubItems.Add(signal.Value.ToString()); this.listView1.Items.Add(item);

}

If the signal objects are no longer needed they should be disposed of:

VB:

For Each ASignal As Signal In Signals

ASignal.Dispose()

Next

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

255

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

C#: foreach(Signal signal in signals)

{ signal.Dispose();

}

Reading IO signal values

These examples show how to read a digital and an analog signal.

Digital signal

This piece of code reads the digital signal DO1 and checks a checkbox if the signal value is

1 (ON):

VB:

Dim Sig As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("DO1")

Dim DigitalSig As DigitalSignal = DirectCast(Sig, DigitalSignal)

Dim val As Integer = DigitalSig.Get

If val = 1 Then

Me.CheckBox1.Checked = True

EndIf

C#:

Signal sig = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("DO1");

DigitalSignal digitalSig = (DigitalSignal)sig; int val = digitalSig.Get(); if (val == 1)

{ this.checkBox1.Checked = true;

}

Analog signal

This piece of code reads the value of the analog signal AO1 and displays it in a textbox:

VB:

Dim Sig As Signal = AController.IOSystem.GetSignal("AO1")

Dim AnalogSig As AnalogSignal = DirectCast(Sig, AnalogSignal)

Dim AnalogSigVal As Single = AnalogSig.Value

Me.TextBox1.Text = AnalogSigVal.ToString()

C#:

Signal sig = aController.IOSystem.GetSignal("AO1");

AnalogSignal analogSig = (AnalogSignal)sig; float analogSigVal = analogSig.Value; this.textBox1.Text = analogSigVal.ToString();

256

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

Writing IO signal values

This section shows how the value of a digital or an analog IO signal can be modified by a

RAB application.

NOTE!

In manual mode a signal value can be modified only if the Access Level of the signal is ALL.

If not, the controller has to be in auto mode.

Digital signal

This piece of code changes the value of a digital signal in the controller when the user checks/ unchecks a checkbox:

VB:

Private Sub CheckBox1_Click(ByVal sender As Object, ByVal e As

System.EventArgs) Handles CheckBox1.Click

If Me.CheckBox1.Checked Then

DigitalSig.Set()

Else

DigitalSig.Reset()

End If

End Sub

C#: private void checkBox1_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)

{ if (this.checkBox1.Checked)

{ digitalSig.Set();

} else

{ digitalSig.Reset();

}

}

NOTE! You can also set the value using the

Value

property.

Analog signal

This piece of code writes the value entered in a text box to the analog signal AO1. The value is converted from string to a float before it is written to the controller:

VB:

Dim AnalogSigVal As Single = Convert.ToSingle(Me.TextBox1.Text)

AnalogSig.Value = AnalogSigVal

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

257

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

C#: float analogSigVal = Convert.ToSingle(this.textBox1.Text); analogSig.Value = analogSigVal;

Listening to signal changes

Once a

Signal

object is available it is possible to add a subscription to its Changed event, which is triggered at a signal change such as changed value, changed simulated status or changed signal quality.

Visual Basic

Friend WithEvents Sig As AnalogSignal

...

AddHandler Sig.Changed, AddressOf AISig_Changed

...

Private Sub Sig_Changed(sender As Object, e As

SignalChangedEventArgs) Handles Sig.Changed

End Sub

C# this.sig.Changed += sig_Changed;

...

private void sig_Changed(object sender, SignalChangedEventArgs e)

{ }

Start and stop subscriptions

It is recommended that you activate and deactivate subscriptions to the

Changed

event if these are not necessary throughout the lifetime of the application:

VB:

AddHandler Sig.Changed, AddressOf Sig_Changed

RemoveHandler Sig.Changed, AddressOf Sig_Changed

C#: this.sig.Changed += sig_Changed; this.sig.Changed -= sig_Changed;

Implementing high priority event subscription

To speed up event notification from the controller it is possible to set up subscription priorities for I/O signals. To do this you use the

Subscribe

method and the enumeration

EventPriority

as argument. The example shows an ordinary signal subscription and a subscription with high priority:

VB:

AddHandler Sig.Changed, AddressOf Sig_Changed

Sig.Subscribe(AddressOf Sig_Changed, EventPriority.High)

258

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

C#: signal.Changed += sig_Changed; signal.Subscribe(sig_Changed, EventPriority.High);

To deactivate subscriptions with high priority you call the

Unsubscribe

method like this:

VB:

C#: sig.Unsubscribe(AddressOf sig_Changed) signal.Unsubscribe(sig_Changed);

Limitations for high priority events

High priority subscriptions can be used for I/O signals and RAPID data declared PERS. The controller can handle 64 high priority subscriptions.

Avoiding threading conflicts

It is important to keep in mind that all controller events use their own threads, which are different from the application GUI thread. This can cause problems if you want to display signal changes in the application GUI. See

Controller events and threads on page 67

for

further information.

If an update of the user interface is not necessary, you do not need to take any special action, but can execute the event handler on the event thread. If, however, you need to show to the user that the signal has changed you should use the

Invoke

method. It forces execution to the window control thread and thus provides a solution to potential threading conflicts.

VB:

Me.Invoke(New EventHandler(AddressOf UpdateUI), New Object()

{sender, e})

C#: this.Invoke(new EventHandler<SignalChangedEventArgs>(UpdateUI), new Object[] { sender, e });

Reading the new value

The

SignalChangedEventArgs

object has a

NewSignalState

property, which has information about signal value, signal quality and whether the signal is simulated or not:

VB:

Private Sub UpdateUI(ByVal Sender As Object, ByVal e As

SignalChangedEventArgs)

Dim State As SignalState = e.NewSignalState

Dim val As Single

Val = State.Value

Me.TextBox1.Text = Val.ToString()

....

End Sub

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

259

7 Using the PC SDK

7.6. IO system domain

Continued

C#: private void UpdateUI(object sender, SignalChangeEventArgs e)

{

SignalState state = e.NewSignalState;

....

float val = state.Value

this.textBox1.Text = val.ToString()

}

NOTE!

There is no guarantee you will receive an initial event when setting up the subscription. To get initial information about the value of a signal you should read it using the

Value

property.

NOTE!

Make sure the subscription is removed before you dispose of the signal. See

Memory management in PC applications on page 213

for further information.

260 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.7. Event log domain

7.7. Event log domain

Overview

Event log messages may contain information about controller status, RAPID execution, the running processes of the controller etc.

Using the SDK it is possible to either read messages in the queue or to use an event handler that will receive a copy of each new log message. An event log message contains queue type, event type, event time, event title and message.

Accessing the controller event log

You access the event log domain through the

Controller

property

EventLog

.

VB:

Private Log As EventLog = AController.EventLog

C#: private EventLog log = aController.EventLog;

Accessing event log categories

All event log messages are organized into categories. To search for an individual message you have to know what category it belongs to. The enumeration type,

CategoryType

, defines all available categories. You can get a category either by using the method

GetCategory

or by using the

Categories

property, which is an array of all available categories.

VB:

Dim Cat As EventLogCategory

Cat = Log.GetCategory(CategoryType.Program) or

C#:

Cat = Log.Categories(4)

EventLogCategory cat; cat = log.GetCategory(CategoryType.Program); or cat = log.GetCategory[4];

NOTE!

The

EventLogCategory

should be disposed of when it is no longer used.

Accessing event log messages

To access a message you use the

Messages

property of the

Category

object. A collection of messages is returned. The collection implements the

ICollection

and

IEnumerable interfaces , which means you can use the common operations for collections. Access is done either using an index or by iterating using foreach

.

VB:

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage = Cat.Messages(1)

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

261

7 Using the PC SDK

7.7. Event log domain

Continued

or

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage

For Each Msg In Cat.Messages

Me.TextBox1.Text = Msg.Title

.....

Next Item

C#:

EventLogMessage msg = cat.Messages[1]; or foreach(EventLogMessage msg in cat.Messages)

{ this.textBox1.Text = msg.Title;

.....

}

MessageWritten event

It is possible to add an event handler that is notified when a new messages is written to the controller event log. This is done by subscribing to the EventLog event

MessageWritten

.

The event argument is of type

MessageWrittenEventArgs

and has a

Message

property, which holds the latest event log message.

VB:

Private Sub Log_MessageWritten(sender As Object, e As

MessageWrittenEventArgs) Handles Log.MessageWritten

Dim Msg As EventLogMessage = e.Message

End Sub

C#: private void log_MessageWritten(object sender,

MessageWrittenEventArgs e)

{

EventLogMessage msg = e.Message;

}

NOTE!

If the application user interface needs to be updated as a result of the event, you must delegate this job to the GUI thread using the

Invoke

method. See

Invoke method on page 68

for

further information and code samples.

TIP!

Find out more about the

EventLogDomain

in the PC SDK Reference help.

262 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.8. Motion domain

7.8. Motion domain

Overview

The

MotionDomain

namespace lets you access the mechanical units of the robot system.

Motion system

You access the motion system by using the

Controller

property

MotionSystem

.

VB:

Private AMotionSystem As MotionSystem

AMotionSystem = AController.MotionSystem

C# private MotionSystem aMotionSystem; aMotionSystem = aController.MotionSystem;

By using the

MotionSystem

object you can, for example, use its

SpeedRatio

property to find out about the current speed of the robot.

Accessing Mechanical units

The mechanical units can be of different types, e.g. a robot with a TCP, a multiple axes manipulator or a single axis unit. All these are available through the MotionSystem property

MechanicalUnits

. If only the currently active mechanical unit is of interest you had better use the

ActiveMechanicalUnit

property.

VB:

Dim AMechCol As MechanicalUnitCollection =

AController.MotionSystem.MechanicalUnits

Dim AMechUnit As MechanicalUnit =

AController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit;

C#:

MechanicalUnitCollection aMechCol = aController.MotionSystem.MechanicalUnits;

MechanicalUnit aMechUnit = aController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit;

Mechanical unit properties and methods

There are numerous properties available for the mechanical unit, e.g.

Name,Model,

NumberOfAxes,SerialNumber,CoordinateSystem

,

MotionMode

,

IsCalibrated

,

Tool

and

WorkObject

etc. It is also possible to get the current position of a mechanical unit as a

RobTarget

or

JointTarget

.

VB:

Dim ARobTarget As RobTarget =

AController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPositio

n(CoordinateSystemType.World)

Dim AJointTarget As JointTarget =

AController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPosition()

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

263

7 Using the PC SDK

7.8. Motion domain

Continued

C#:

RobTarget aRobTarget = aController.MotionSystem.GetActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPositio

n(CoordinateSystemType.World);

JointTarget aJointTarget = aController.MotionSystem.ActiveMechanicalUnit.GetPosition()

;

TIP!

Find out more about the

MotionDomain

in the PC SDK Reference help.

264 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.9. File system domain

7.9. File system domain

Overview

Using the SDK it is possible to create, save, load, rename and delete files in the controller file system. It is also possible to create and delete directories.

Accessing files and directories

You access the file system domain through the

Controller

property

FileSystem

.

VB:

Private AFileSystem As FileSystem = AController.FileSystem

C#:

FileSystem aFileSystem = aController.FileSystem;

Controller and PC directory

You can get and set the directory on the controller and on the local PC system using the

RemoteDirectory

and

LocalDirectory

properties.

VB:

C#:

Dim RemoteDir As String = AController.FileSystem.RemoteDirectory

Dim LocalDir As String = AController.FileSystem.LocalDirectory

string remoteDir = aController.FileSystem.RemoteDirectory; string localDir = aController.FileSystem.LocalDirectory;

Environment variables

When specifying file system paths you can use environment variables to denote the HOME, system, backup and temp directories of the currently used system. When an application uses

“(BACKUP)$” it is internally interpreted as the path to the backup directory of the current system. The other environment variables are: HOME, TEMP and SYSTEM.

Loading files

You can load a file from the controller to the PC using the

GetFile

method. The method generates an exception if the operation did not work. The arguments are complete paths including filenames.

VB:

AController.FileSystem.FileSystem.GetFile(RemoteFilePath,

LocalFilePath)

C#: aController.FileSystem.GetFile(remoteFilePath, localFilePath);

Saving files

You can save a file on the controller file system by using the

PutFile

method. The method generates an exception if the operation did not work. The arguments are complete paths including filenames.

VB:

AController.FileSystem.PutFile(LocalFilePath, RemoteFilePath)

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

265

7 Using the PC SDK

7.9. File system domain

Continued

C#: aController.FileSystem.PutFile(localFilePath, remoteFilePath);

CopyFile and CopyDirectory

The

PutFile

/

GetFile

methods generate a copy of a file and transfer it to or from the controller file system. Using the

CopyFile

and

CopyDirectory

you can create a copy directly on the controller:

VB:

AController.FileSystem.CopyFile(FromFilePath, ToFilePath)

AController.FileSystem.CopyDirectory(FromDirPath, ToDirPath)

C#: aController.FileSystem.CopyFile(fromFilePath, toFilePath); aController.FileSystem.CopyDirectory(fromDirPath, toDirPath);

Getting multiple files and directories

The

FileSystem

class has a method called

GetFilesAndDirectories

. It can be used to retrieve an array of

ControllerFileSystemInfo

objects with information about individual files and directories. The

ControllerFileSystemInfo

object can then be cast to either a

ControllerFileInfo

object or a

ControllerDirectoryInfo

object.

This example uses search pattern to limit the search.

VB:

Dim AnArray As ControllerFileSystemInfo()

Dim info As ControllerFileSystemInfo

AnArray = AController.FileSystem.GetFilesAndDirectories("search pattern")

Dim I As Integer

For I = 0 To array.Length -1 info = AnArray(I)

......

Next

C#:

ControllerFileSystemInfo[] anArray;

ControllerFileSystemInfo info; anArray = aController.FileSystem.GetFilesAndDirectories("search pattern"); for (int i=0;i<anArray.Length;i++) { info = anArray[i];

......

}

266

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.9. File system domain

Continued

Using search patterns

As seen in the example above, you can use search patterns to locate files and directories using the

GetFilesAndDirectories

method. The matching process follows the Wildcard pattern matching in Visual Studio. This is a brief summary:

Character in pattern

?

*

#

[charlist]

[!charlist]

Matches in string

Any single character

Zero or more characters

Any single digit (0–9)

Any single character in charlist

Any single character not in charlist

TIP!

Find out more about the

FileSystemDomain

in the PC SDK Reference help.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 267

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

7.10. Messaging domain

Overview

The

Messaging

domain of the PC SDK can be used to send and receive data between a PC

SDK application and a RAPID task.

The corresponding RAPID functionality, RAPID Message Queue, includes RAPID data types and RAPID instructions and functions for sending and receiving data. It enables communication between RAPID tasks or between a RAPID task and a RAB application.

This chapter provides information about how to implement messaging in a PC SDK application. To make it work it is necessary to do part of the implementation in RAPID. In order to show how this can be done a simple but complete code example in C# and RAPID is provided at the end of the chapter.

NOTE!

See Application manual - Robot communication and I/O Control for detailed information about how to implement messaging in RAPID.

RobotWare option

The functionality in RAPID that is needed to utilize messaging - RAPID Message Queue - is included in the RobotWare options PC Interface, FlexPendant Interface and Multitasking. As

PC Interface is required on a robot controller to be used with a PC SDK client, this means no extra option is needed to start using RAPID Message Queue with a PC SDK application.

Messaging illustration

The illustration shows possible senders and receivers in the robot system. The arrows represent ways to communicate by posting a message to a queue.

268 en0700000430

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

NOTE!

In principle, messages might as well be sent between a PC SDK client and a RAB application running on the FlexPendant.

NOTE!

The messaging functionality of the FlexPendant SDK has not yet been made public, but in

RAB 5.11 a mechanism has been implemented, which allows advanced users access to it. You should contact support if you need information about how to use it.

Benefits

Together with RAPID Message Queue the functionality of the

Messaging

domain represent a new, flexible way for a RAB application to interact with a RAPID task.

Messaging is usually done when a RAPID task is executing, but it is also possible to send a message to a RAPID task when it has been stopped. The RAPID interrupt will then occur once the RAPID task has been started.

An simple example of usage would be to set a flag from a RAB application in order to control the program flow in the RAPID program.

NOTE!

Sending messages can be done in both manual and auto mode. As opposed to using

RapidData

to modify a RAPID variable no mastership is required.

The Messaging namespace

The Microsoft Windows operating system provides mechanisms for facilitating communications and data sharing between applications. Collectively, activities enabled by these mechanisms are called Interprocess communications (IPC).

These are the classes and enumerations available in the

Messaging

namespace:

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

269

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

7.9_1

270

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

The

Ipc

class is used to handle message queues with methods like

GetQueue

,

CreateQueue

,

DeleteQueue

etc. When you have an

IpcQueue

object you can use its

Send method to send an

IpcMessage

to a RAPID task or its

Receive

method to receive a message from a RAPID task.

When sending a message you use an existing queue in the controller as the

IpcQueue

object.

The naming principle of queues in the controller is using the name of the corresponding task prefixed with “RMQ_”, e.g “RMQ_T_ROB1”. To be able to receive a message from RAPID you must first create your own message queue and use that object with the

Receive

method.

NOTE!

When the execution context in a RAPID task is lost, e.g. when the program pointer is moved to main, the corresponding queue is emptied.

Basic approach

To utilize messaging in a PC SDK application you need to do the implementation both in

RAPID and in the PC application.

This is the general approach for sending data from a PC application and receiving it in a

RAPID task:

1. In the PC application connect to the queue of the RAPID task.

2. Create the message.

3. Send the message.

4. In the RAPID program set up a trap routine that reads the message. Connect an interrupt so that the trap routine is called each time a new message appears.

For a complete code example using this scenario see

Code example on page 274

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

271

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

What can be sent in a message?

In RAPID there is a rmqmessage data type

. In the PC SDK the corresponding type is

IpcMessage

. An

IpcMessage

object stores the actual data in the message, but also information about message size, who the sender is etc.

The data in a message is a pretty-printed string with data type name (and array dimensions) followed by the actual data value. The data type can be any RAPID data type. Arrays and user defined records are allowed.

Message data - examples:

“robtarget;[[930,0,1455],[1,0,0,0],[0,0,0,0],[9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9]]”

“string;“Hello world!””

“num;23”

“bool;FALSE”

“bool{2, 2};[[TRUE,TRUE],[FALSE,FALSE]]”

“msgrec;[100,200]” (user defined data type)

The method

IpcMessage.SetData

is used to fill the

IpcMessage

with the appropriate data. Likewise, the

GetData

method retrieves the data from an

IpcMessage

object.

NOTE!

The

IpcMessage.Data

is set and retrieved as a byte array,

SetData(byte[] data) and byte[] GetData()

. This means you must convert the message data string to a byte array before calling the

SetData

method. It may look like this in C#:

Byte[] data = new UTF8Encoding().GetBytes("string;\"Hello world\"");

See

Code example on page 274

for a few other examples.

NOTE!

The RAPID program can specify what RAPID data type it expects to receive by connecting it to a TRAP routine. A message containing data of a data type that no interrupt is connected to will be discarded with only an event log warning.

RAPID Message Queue system parameters

This is a brief description of each system parameter of RAPID Message Queue. For further information, see the respective parameter in Technical reference manual - System parameters.

These parameters belong to the Task type in the Controller topic:.

Parameter Description

RmqType The following values are possible:

• None - Disables the RAPID Message Queue functionality in this

RAPID task. This is the default value.

• Internal - Enables the RAPID Message Queue for local usage on the controller.

• Remote - Enables the RAPID Message Queue for local usage and for PC and FlexPendant applications.

272

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

Parameter Description

RmqMode • Interrupt mode - A message can be received either by connecting a trap routine to a specified message type or by using the send-wait functionality. Any messages that are not the answer to an active send-wait instruction or have the type connected to a trap routine will be discarded. This is the default mode.

• Synchronous mode - All messages will be queued and can only be received through the new read-wait instruction

RMQReadWait

. No messages will be discarded unless the queue is full. The send-wait instruction is not available in this mode. New mode from 5.12.

RmqMaxMsgSize The maximum data size, in bytes, for a message. The default value is

350. The value cannot be changed in RobotStudio or on the FlexPendant.

RmqMaxNoOfMsg Maximum number of messages in queue. The default value is 5. The value cannot be changed in RobotStudio or on the FlexPendant.

NOTE!

To read the values of these system parameter from the PC SDK you use the

IpcQueue properties

RemoteAccessible, MessageSizeLimit

and

Capacity.

Remote RmqType

The system parameter RmqType must be set to Remote to enable messaging between RAPID and RAB:

7.9_2

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

273

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

Code example

This simple messaging example can be tested with a virtual or a real controller. The system parameter RmqType must be set to Remote as shown in

RAPID Message Queue system parameters on page 272

.

The following code sample creates a message and sends it to a RAPID task, which reads it and sets a RAPID variable accordingly. Then an “Acknowledged” message is sent back to the

PC SDK queue. Finally, the PC SDK application launches the received message in a Message

Box.

PC SDK - C#

A message is created and sent to the RAPID queue “RMQ_T_ROB1”. An answer message is then received from RAPID and launched in a Message Box.

C#:

//declarations private Controller c; private IpcQueue tRob1Queue; private IpcQueue myQueue; private IpcMessage sendMessage; private IpcMessage recMessage;

...

//initiation code, eg in constructor c = new Controller(); //default ctrl used here (App.config)

//get T_ROB1 queue to be able to send msgs to RAPID task tRob1Queue = c.Ipc.GetQueue("RMQ_T_ROB1");

//create my own RAB queue to be able to receive msgs if (!c.Ipc.Exists("RAB_Q"))

{ myQueue = c.Ipc.CreateQueue("RAB_Q", 5, Ipc.IPC_MAXMSGSIZE); myQueue = c.Ipc.GetQueue("RAB_Q");

274

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

}

//Create IpcMessage objects for sending and receiving sendMessage = new IpcMessage(); recMessage = new IpcMessage();

...

//in an event handler, eg. button_Click

SendMessage(true);

CheckReturnMsg();

...

public void SendMessage(bool boolMsg)

{

Byte[] data = null;

//Create message data if (boolMsg)

{ data = new UTF8Encoding().GetBytes("bool;TRUE");

} else

{ data = new UTF8Encoding().GetBytes("bool;FALSE");

}

//Place data and sender information in message sendMessage.SetData(data); sendMessage.Sender = myQueue.QueueId;

}

//Send message to the RAPID queue tRob1Queue.Send(sendMessage);

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

275

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

RAPID private void CheckReturnMsg()

{

IpcReturnType ret = IpcReturnType.Timeout; string answer = string.Empty; int timeout = 5000;

//Check for msg in the RAB queue ret = myQueue.Receive(timeout, recMessage); if (ret == IpcReturnType.OK)

{

//convert msg data to string answer = new UTF8Encoding().GetString(recMessage.Data);

MessageBox.Show(answer);

}

//MessageBox should show: string;"Acknowledged"

} else

{

MessageBox.Show("Timeout!");

}

A trap is created for a message of data type bool

. In the trap the value of the message data is assigned to the flag variable. Then an “Acknowledged” message is sent back to the PC SDK client. In main the WHILE loop is executed until a message with a TRUE value is received.

MODULE RAB_COMMUNICATION

VAR bool flag := FALSE;

VAR intnum connectnum;

PROC main()

CONNECT connectnum WITH RABMsgs;

IRMQMessage flag, connectnum;

WHILE flag = FALSE DO

!do something, eg. normal processing...

WaitTime 3;

ENDWHILE

!PC SDK message received - do something...

TPWrite "Message from PC SDK, will now...";

IDelete connectnum;

EXIT;

276

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

Continued

ENDPROC

TRAP RABMsgs

VAR rmqmessage msg;

VAR rmqheader header;

VAR rmqslot rabclient;

VAR num userdef;

VAR string ack := "Acknowledged";

RMQGetMessage msg;

RMQGetMsgHeader msg \Header:= header\SenderId:=rabclient\UserDef:=userdef;

!check data type and assign value to flag variable

IF header.datatype = "bool" THEN

RMQGetMsgData msg, flag;

!return receipt to sender

RMQSendMessage rabclient, ack;

ELSE

TPWrite "Unknown data received in RABMsgs...";

ENDIF

ENDTRAP

ENDMODULE

NOTE!

Error handling should be implemented in C#, as well as in RAPID.

NOTE!

From RW 5.12 there is a new RAPID instruction,

RMQEmptyQueue

that can be used to empty the queue in a task.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 277

7 Using the PC SDK

7.10. Messaging domain

278 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.1. Debug output

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1 FlexPendant - Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.1. Debug output

Overview

It is possible to get debug output from the FlexPendant by using the network. This is useful for several reasons. It will reveal any exceptions thrown during execution, for example, providing you with error messages and call stacks. Moreover, it can help you check memory consumption and memory leaks in your application.

The FP message is packed into a network message and sent out on the network as a broadcast message on port 9998. Such a message can be picked up in different ways:

•

Connect a hub on the local FlexPendant network and connect a PC to it. Use nc.exe to pick up the messages (nc - lup 9998).

• The messages sent are also stored in a ring-buffer of size 100kB. To read the buffer to file and store it on the controller, you can use the FlexPendant Command Server. Use

fpcmd “-d”.

•

It is also possible to start a task on the controller that listens to port 9998 and displays all messages in the console buffer. Use command fp_enable_console_output.

TIP!

For a list of exceptions that the IRC5 Controller may throw, see

Exception error codes on page 292

.

Enable debug output

To enable debug output write fpcmd_enable_console_output

in the controller console window.

These are the console commands used to enable and disable printouts:

Console command

fpcmd_enable_console_output 1 fpcmd_enable_console_output 2 fpcmd_enable_console_output 3

Result

Starts producing printouts from RobotWare to the robot controller console.

Starts producing printouts from SDK application.

Combines the two above: RW + SDK printouts.

fpcmd_disable_console_output Stops printout to the robot controller console.

The command below can be used to retrieve detailed status of the robot controller, which may be useful, although it may not be specifically related to your application.

Console command

fpcmd “-d”

Result

Produces a log file with extensive information on system status to the robot controller file system(hd0a/ temp). Use an ftp client or the File Manager in

RobotStudio to transfer the file to your PC.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

279

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.1. Debug output

Continued

FlexPendant Command Server

By using the command line on the controller you can send commands to the FlexPendant. The

FlexPendant has a command server that interprets the commands and performs the requested operation. The syntax for command line commands is fpcmd “<command>”. The only command you need to remember is fpcmd "-h"

, which is the Help command. It produces a printout of available FlexPendant commands in the controller console:

-> fpcmd “-h”value = 8 = 0x8-> [fp]: FlexPendantCmd: Help fpcmd “-h”: Help fpcmd

“-a”: Adapter show routine fpcmd “-m”: Measure time in adapters fpcmd “-i”: Display

FlexPendant Information fpcmd “-f”: Bring GTPU Services to front fpcmd “-x”: Hide startup progress bar fpcmd “-s”: Start application fpcmd “-d”: Copy Debug file to controller fpcmd “-as”: Print screen fpcmd “-rd”: RobAPI debug fpcmd “-restart”:

280

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.1. Debug output

Continued

Restart Device fpcmd “-memShow”: Available memory fpcmd “-module”: Module information of a process fpcmd “-filePut”: Upload a file to the FlexPendant fpcmd

“-filleted”: Download a file to the FlexPendant fpcmd “-diarist”: List a directory

NOTE!

All commands support -? (e.g. fpcmd “-memShow -?”), which gives further information about the specific command.

TIP!

It is possible to monitor memory consumption in the robot controller console window:

1. Write fpcmd_enable_console_output 3

.

2. Write fpcmd "-memShow"

.

See

Discover memory leaks on page 186

for further information.

Trace and Debug

The

ABB.Robotics.Diagnostics namespace provides trace and debug services. Its

Trace

and

Debug

classes are specifically designed for the FlexPendant environment.

The properties and methods in the

Trace

class are used to instrument release builds, which allows you to monitor the health of your application running in a real-life setting. Tracing can help you to isolate problems and fix them without disturbing a running system.

If you use methods in the

Debug

class to print debugging information and check your logic with assertions, you can make your code more robust without impacting the performance and code size of your shipping product. In Visual Studio, creating a debug build enables

Debug

.

Trace

and

Debug

give printout information during execution. Messages are displayed on the

FlexPendant screen or in the robot controller console. The functionality is similar to that provided by the .Net

Trace

and

Debug

classes.

The

Assert

method checks for a condition and displays an assert message on the

FlexPendant, including detailed information and a stack trace, if the condition is false. The message is also displayed in the controller console window if you enter the command fpcmd_enable_console_output

first.

NOTE!

Add the

ABB.Robotics.Diagnostics

namespace to the using

section at the top of your source code file.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 281

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.2. Debugging the virtual FlexPendant

8.1.2. Debugging the virtual FlexPendant

Overview

When debugging your application it is often convenient to use the virtual environment, but it is almost as easy to attach the Visual Studio debugger to the real FlexPendant device. For information about how that is done see

Debugging the FlexPendant device on page 286

.

This section describes how to start the VS debugger, attach a running Virtual FlexPendant to it, set up break points and step through the source code of a FlexPendant application.

282

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.2. Debugging the virtual FlexPendant

Continued

Debugging procedure

There are several ways of attaching a Visual Studio debugger to a running Virtual

FlexPendant application. In this section one method is described in detail.

There is no way to start your FlexPendant application from inside the Visual Studio environment. You must start by deploying the application to the Virtual FlexPendant in

RobotStudio. How to do this is described in

Hands on - Hello world on page 86

. Then you

start the Virtual FlexPendant and attach the Visual Studio debugger to it.

NOTE!

In order to use break points the project build configuration must be Debug. You set it in the the Build tab of the Project Properties. The output directory, where you find the assembly

(*.dll), the proxy assembly (*gtpu.dll) and the program database (*.pdb) is the bin/Debug directory, a sub-directory of your VS project.

Attach to Process

When you have a running application on the Virtual FlexPendant follow these steps:

Step Action

1 In Visual Studio on the Debug menu, select Attach to Process. It brings up this dialog:

2

3

4

9.1.3_1

Select the Virtual FlexPendant.exe process and press the Attach button.

Set a break point in your source code.

On the Virtual FlexPendant, press a button of your application or something else that will make program execution hit the breakpoint.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

283

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.2. Debugging the virtual FlexPendant

Continued

Step Action

5 On the Debug menu, point at Windows and select the debugging information to be displayed while debugging. See example below:

284

6

7

9.1.3_2

On the Debug menu, select the appropriate Step command when stepping through your code.

On the Debug menu, click Detach All or Stop Debugging when you want to stop debugging.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.2. Debugging the virtual FlexPendant

Continued

Windows Task Manager

You can also attach a running application through the Windows Task Manager.

Step

1 Start Windows Task Manager and select the Processes tab.

2

3

9.1.3_3

Select the Virtual FlexPendant.exe process and right-click to get the context menu.

In that menu select Debug. You will get a warning message, but select Yes.

A Just -In -Time Debugging dialog will appear. Select your application project as the debugger to use.

Launching debugger programatically

Yet another way of attaching a debugger is to launch it programatically, by writing code in your application.

Step Action

Insert the following line where you want the debugger to start:

System.Diagnostics.Debugger.Launch()

Start the application in the Virtual FlexPendant and perform the action which is to launch the debugger. A Just- In-Time Debugging dialog will appear.

Select your VS project as the debugger. Click OK and start the debug session.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 285

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.3. Debugging the FlexPendant device

8.1.3. Debugging the FlexPendant device

Overview

This section provides information on how to do debug an application executing on the real

FlexPendant device.

In general, using the Visual Studio debugger to debug the device works very well and is strongly recommended, but depending on the OS, Visual Studio version and FlexPendant version you are using the requirements for setting up and attaching the Visual Studio debugger will differ somewhat.

Further information and updates concerning this topic will from this release be published on the RAB User Forum (and not in the User's Guide). See

RAB User Forum on page 288

.

Prerequisites

The following requirements have to be met:

•

VS 2005 with SP1 is required to debug the FlexPendant without any adaptations.

• Service Pack 1 or 2 for .NET Compact Framework 2.0 (.NET CF 2.0 SP2) is required for setting up and using the Visual Studio debugger on the FlexPendant device. It can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads.

•

To debug with VS 2008 (as well as VS 2005 without SP1) you must follow a procedure that will be presented on the RAB User Forum. The procedure will be different for each RobotWare release.

• If your PC is running under Windows Vista “Windows Mobile Device Center” needs to be installed in order to connect to the device.

Setting up the network

This illustration shows how to connect the FlexPendant, the Robot Controller and your PC in order to debug your application using the Visual Studio debugger.

286

9.1.4_3

The FlexPendant has a static IP address 192.168.126.10. Your PC IP address must be one on the 126 subnet, i.e. 192.168.126.x (not 1 or 255).

Note that this setup is completely independent of the LAN and Service ports. You are plugging the TPU cable from the RC into the switch, a cable from the switch to the RC, and a cable from your PC to the switch.

A connection over the LAN port is optional, but useful, as you may need to use RSO or FTP at the same time. To use both connections, your PC requires two NICs.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.3. Debugging the FlexPendant device

Continued

Debugging procedure

Follow these steps to set up and attach the Visual Studio 2005 SP1debugger to the

FlexPendant device:

Step Action

1

2

On the Tools menu in Visual Studio 2005 click Options.

In the Options dialog expand the Device Tools node and select Devices. Select

Windows CE 5.0 Device as shown below.

3

4

9.1.4_6

Note! If your FlexPendant version is SxTpu1 the option Windows CE 5.0 Device is not available. Instead you should select Pocket PC 2003 Device.

When the right device has been selected click Properties and then Configure.

Apply the settings shown in the picture.

9.1.4_7

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

287

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.3. Debugging the FlexPendant device

Continued

Step Action

5 On the Debug/Tools menu in Visual Studio click Attach To Process. In the dialog select Smart Device for Transport and click the Browse button to specify platform and device. Then click Connect.

6

7

8

9.1.4_8

In the Available Processes list select taf.exe. Click Attach.

Set a break point in your source code.

On the FlexPendant, press a button of your application or something else that will make program execution hit the breakpoint.

NOTE!

If your PC is NOT using XP with VS 2005 SP1 you need to find information on how to attach the VS debugger for your specific environment on the RAB User Forum.

RAB User Forum

The User Forum of ABB’s RobotStudio Community has a section dedicated to Robot

Application Builder. Here beginners as well as experts discuss code and solutions online. This is also where you find RAB releases for free download and any information that the

development or support team want to share with you. See

RobotStudio Community on page

17

.

288 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.4. Troubleshooting FlexPendant applications

8.1.4. Troubleshooting FlexPendant applications

Overview

If you encounter problems when running your application there are a few things you should do before contacting your service organization. The following steps represent a rough guideline:

Action

1 Is it possible to start your application? If not see

FlexPendant application does not start on page 289

.

2 Have you checked the RAB Release Notes? Many questions will find an answer in the

Release Notes of the specific release. These are available on the RW DVD and at the

Software Download Site.

3 Have you tried to pinpoint the problem by debugging the FlexPendant? If not see

Debugging the FlexPendant device on page 286

for information about how to do it.

4 Have you tried to get debug printouts? See

Debug output on page 279

for further information.

5 Is the problem FlexPendant hangings? Make sure you use

Invoke

when modifying the

user interface due to a robot controller event. See

GUI and controller event threads in conflict on page 68

and

Invoke method on page 68

.

When a hanging occurs attach the Visual Studio debugger to the FlexPendant. On the

Debug menu, point at Windows and select Threads. Examine the threads to discover any deadlocks.

TIP!

If you still have not found a solution to your problem, take a look at the User Forum of

RobotStudio Community, which includes a forum dedicated to discussion and chat on Robot

Application Builder topics. See

RobotStudio Community on page 17

FlexPendant application does not start

If you are unable to start your application the table below suggests possible scenarios.

Problem

The proxy assembly (*.gtpu.dll) is not built.

Possible solution

Correct any parameter error in the TpsView

attribute. See

FlexPendant TpsView attribute on page 54

.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

289

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.4. Troubleshooting FlexPendant applications

Continued

Problem Possible solution

The ABB Compliance Tool complains it cannot find the C# compiler.

The application does not appear in the

ABB menu.

It happens that the installation of Visual Studio does not set the path to the C# compiler properly.

The C# compiler is necessary for running the ABB

Compliance Tool.

Confirm that the C# compiler is available by starting a command window and run “CSC.EXE”.

If the result is similar to this the path is properly set:

C:\>csc.exe

Microsoft (R) Visual C# .NET Compiler version

7.10.3052.4

for Microsoft (R) .NET Framework version

1.1.4322Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation

2001-2002. All rights reserved.

fatal error CS2008: No inputs specified

If not, find CSC.EXE and copy its path to the

Properties dialog of your Visual Studio project.

Also add the path to the system PATH environment variables.For Windows 2000 Pro and

Windows XP find the dialog for this at:Control

Panel -> System -> Advanced ->Environment

Variables -> System variables-> Add new. Add the path to the directory where the C# compiler is kept. Notice that a semicolon separates the path items.Verify in the command window afterwards that the CSC.EXE runs.

Make sure the robot system has the FlexPendant

Interface option.

Null reference exception or “Can’t find

object” when tapping the application icon in the ABB menu.

Make sure all arguments in the TpsView attribute are appropriate. See

FlexPendant TpsView attribute on page 54

.

The bitmap constructor fails when the real FlexPendant tries to load your images, in the virtual environment this does not happen.

Change your images if they use more than 256 colors. The operating system of the first generation FlexPendant device (SxTPU1) only supports 256 colors.

The Virtual FlexPendant process remains alive.

If you forget to dispose an object that has a COM reference, such as the Controller object or a

Signal, the Virtual FlexPendant process might stay alive. Go through the application and make sure that you dispose of all objects that have a

Dispose method.

Important support information

If you cannot solve the problem on your own, make sure that before taking contact with a support organization this information is available:

•

Written description of the problem.

• Application source code.

•

System error logs.

• A backup of the system.

•

Description of work-around if such exists.

290

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.1.4. Troubleshooting FlexPendant applications

Continued

TIP!

Even better than the complete application is a small repro program, which exposes your problem.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 291

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.1. Debugging

8.2 PC - Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.1. Debugging

Introduction

Using the Visual Studio debugger for a PC SDK application presents no difference compared to standard .NET development. Debugging can be done using the virtual IRC5 in

RobotStudio or a real controller.

Exception error codes

Some exceptions that may appear during development have error codes associated with them.

The error codes may help you correct the problem.

Code

0x80040401

0x80040402

0xC0040401

0xC0040402

0xC0040403

0xC0040404

0xC0040405

0xC0040406

0xC0040408

0xC0040409

0xC0040410

0xC0040411

0xC0040412

0xC0040413

0xC0040414

0xC0040415

0xC0040416

0xC0040417

0xC0040418

0xC0040601

Description

The requested poll level could not be met, poll level low is used.

The requested poll level could not be met, poll level medium is used.

No connection with controller.

Error connecting to controller.

No response from controller.

Message queue full. (Should only happen if asynchronous calls are made.)

Waiting for a resource.

The message sent is too large to handle.

A string does not contain characters exclusively from a supported encoding, e.g. ISO-8859-1 (ISO-Latin1).

The resource can not be released since it is in use.

The client is already logged on as a controller user.

The controller was not present in NetScan.

The NetScanID is no longer in use. Controller removed from list.

The client id is not associated with a controller user. Returned only by methods that need to check this before sending request to controller. Otherwise, see 0xC004840F.

The RW version is later than the installed RobAPI. A newer

RobAPI needs to be installed. Returned by RobHelperFactory.

The major and minor part of the RW version is known, but the revision is later and not fully compatible. A newer RobAPI needs to be installed. Code returned by RobHelperFactory.

The RW version is no longer supported. Code returned by Rob-

HelperFactory.

The helper type is not supported by the RW. Helper might be obsolete or for later RW versions, or the helper may not be supported by a BootLevel controller. Code returned by Rob-

HelperFactory.

System id and network id mismatch, they do not identify the same controller.

Call was made by other client than the one that made the

Connect() call.

292

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

0xC0040703

0xC0040704

0xC0040705

0xC0048401

0xC0048402

0xC0048403

0xC0048404

0xC0048405

0xC0048406

0xC0048407

0xC0048408

0xC0048409

0xC004840A

0xC004840B

0xC004840C

0xC004840D

0xC004840F

0xC0048410

0xC0048411

0xC0048412

0xC0048413

0xC0048414

0xC0048415

Code

0xC0040602

0xC0040603

0xC0040604

0xC0040605

0xC0040606

0xC0040607

0xC0040608

0xC0040609

0xC0040701

0xC0040702

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.1. Debugging

Continued

Description

File not found on the local file system. Can be that file, directory or device does not exist.

File not found on the remote file system. Can be that file, directory or device does not exist.

Error when accessing/creating file on the local file system.

Error when accessing/creating file on the remote file system.

The path or filename is too long or otherwise bad for the

VxWorks file system.

The file transfer was interrupted. When transferring to remote system, the cause may be that the remote device is full.

The local device is full.

Client already has a connection and can not make a new connection until the present one is disconnected.

One or more files in the release directory is corrupt and cannot be used when launching a VC.

One or more files in the system directory is corrupt and cannot be used when launching a VC.

A VC for this system has already been started; only one VC per system is allowed.

Could not warm start VC since it must be cold started first.

The requested operation failed since VC ownership is not held or could not be obtained.

Out of memory.

Not yet implemented.

The service is not supported in this version of the controller.

Operation not allowed on active system.

The data requested does not exist.

The directory does not contain all required data to complete the operation.

Operation rejected by the controller safety access restriction mechanism.

The resource is not held by caller.

An argument specified by the client is not valid for this type of operation.

Mismatch in controller id between backup and current system.

Mismatch in key id, i.e. options, languages etc. between backup and current system.

Mismatch in robot type between backup and current system.

Client not allowed to log on as local user.

The client is not logged on as a controller user.

The requested resource is already held by caller

The max number of the requested resources has been reached.

No request active for the given user.

Operation/request timed out on controller.

No local user is logged on.

The operation was not allowed for the given user.

Continues on next page

293

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.1. Debugging

Continued

Code

0xC0048416

0xC0048417

0xC0048418

0xC0048419

0xC004841A

0xC004841B

0xC004841C

294

0xC004841D

0xC004841E

0xC004841F

0xC0048420

0xC004900A

0xC004900B

0xC004900C

0xC004900D

0xC004900E

0xC004900F

0xC0049010

0xC0049011

0xC0049012

0xC0049013

0xC0049014

0xC0048421

0xC0048422

0xC0048423

0xC0049000

0xC0049001

0xC0049002

0xC0049003

0xC0049004

0xC0049005

0xC0049006

0xC0049007

0xC0049008

0xC0049009

Description

The URL used to initialize the helper does not resolve to a valid object.

The amount of data is too large to fulfill the request.

Controller is busy. Try again later.

The request was denied.

Requested resource is held by someone else.

Requested feature is disabled.

The operation is not allowed in current operation mode. For example, a remote user may not be allowed to perform the operation in manual mode.

The user does not have required mastership for the operation.

Operation not allowed while backup in progress.

Operation not allowed when tasks are in synchronized state.

Operation not allowed when task is not active in task selection panel.

Mismatch in controller id between backup and current system.

Mismatch in controller id between backup and current.

Invalid client id.

RAPID symbol was not found.

The given source position is illegal for the operation.

The given file was not recognized as a program file, e.g. the

XML semantics may be incorrect.

Ambiguous module name.

The RAPID program name is not set.

Module is read protected.

Module is write protected.

Operation is illegal in current execution state.

Operation is illegal in current task state.

The robot is not on path and is unable to restart. Regain to or clear path.

Operation is illegal at current execution level.

Operation can not be performed without destroying the current execution context.

The RAPID heap memory is full.

Operation not allowed due to syntax error(s).

Operation not allowed due to semantic error(s).

Given routine is not a legal entry point. Possible reasons are: routine is a function, or routine has parameters.

Illegal to move PCP to given place.

Max number of rob targets exceeded.

Object is not mod possible. Possible reasons are: object is a variable, object is a parameter, object is an array.

Operation not allowed with displacement active.

The robot is not on path and is unable to restart. Regain to path.

Clear is not allowed.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Code

0xC0049015

0xC004A000

0xC004A001

0xC004A002

0xC004A003

0xC004A004

0xC004A005

0xC004A006

0xC004A007

0xC004A008

0xC004A009

0xC004A00B

0xC004A00C

0xC004A200

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.1. Debugging

Continued

Description

Previously planned path remains. Choose to either consume the path, which means the initial movement might be in an unexpected direction, or to clear the path and move directly to next target.

General file handling error.

The device is full.

Wrong disk. Change disk and try again.

The device is not ready.

Invalid path.

Not a valid device.

Unable to create directory.

The directory does not exist.

The directory already exists.

The directory contains data.

Unable to create file.

File not found or could not be opened for reading.

Disable of unit not allowed at trustlevel 0.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 295

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.2. Troubleshooting

8.2.2. Troubleshooting

Overview

If you encounter problems with your PC SDK application follow these steps before contacting ABB support.

Action

1 See if your problem is in the checklist of the next section.

2 Many questions will find an answer in the Release Notes of the specific RAB release.

The document is available on the RW DVD and on the Software Download Site.

3 Pinpoint the problem by debugging your code so that a precise problem description can be provided.

4 See the User Forum of ABB’s RobotStudio Community, which includes a forum dedicated to discussion and chat on Robot Application Builder topics.

TIP!

At www.abb.com/roboticssoftware there is a link to the RobotStudio Community.

Checklist

•

Cannot connect to controllers? Make sure the system on the controller has the

RobotWare option PC Interface. This applies to both virtual and real controllers.

• Is the problem GUI hangings? Make sure you use

Invoke

when modifying the user

interface due to a robot controller event. See

GUI and controller event threads in conflict on page 68

and

Invoke method on page 68

for further information.

•

Is the problem related to netscan? If NetworkScanner.Scan does not find the robot controller during netscan you should try to increase the time allowed for scanning.

Increase the networks canner delay time in an app.config file as explained in

Application configuration file on page 43

or add the time directly in the code like this:

NetworkScanner aScanner = new NetworkScanner(); aScanner.Scan();

System.Threading.Thread.Sleep(4000);aScanner.Scan();

• Do you get “Invalid Client ID” when trying to do a read operation toward the robot controller? If so, the reason is probably that you have forgotten to log on to the controller. To be able to write to RAPID data or to the configuration database, for example, you also need to require mastership. For further information see

Logon and logoff on page 214

and

Mastership on page 41

.

•

If you are working with a previous version of RAB (earlier than 5.10) you might run into problems related to licence verification? If you get the run-time error “A valid

license cannot be granted for the type ABB.Robotics.Controllers.Licenses.PCSdk.

Contact the manufacturer of the component for more information“ when accessing the

NetworkScanner

and the

Controller

classes you need to add a licx file to the project. See

Licenses.licx on page 40

for further information.

296

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.2. Troubleshooting

Continued

Important support information

If you cannot solve the problem on your own, make sure this information is available when taking contact with ABB’s support organization:

• Written description of the problem.

•

Application source code.

• System error logs.

•

A backup of the system.

• Description of work-around if such exists.

TIP!

Even better than the complete application is a small repro program, which exposes your problem.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 297

8 Debugging and troubleshooting

8.2.2. Troubleshooting

298 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

8.2.2. Troubleshooting

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 299

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Introduction

This chapter provides the information needed to localize a customized application. The

FlexPendant has built-in support for localization, and the mechanisms used by the standard

FlexPendant applications can also be used by RAB applications.

This enables customized applications to be presented in the active language of the

FlexPendant, i.e. the language selected in the standard view Control Panel - Language.

For this to work the texts displayed in the customized application must be translated and the application localized as described in this chapter.

Get started

Develop the application using English as the default language. The recommendation is to design, implement and test the application before adding support for other languages. To localize a FlexPendant application carefully complete each procedure of this chapter.

NOTE!

A method is needed to handle localization when new application functionality is added.

1 Create project for text resources

This procedure sets up a separate project for the user interface texts.

Step Action

1. Create a new project in the solution. Choose a Smart Device - Windows CE 5.0 -

Empty Project and name the project <YourAppName>Texts.

NOTE!

Both projects should belong to the same solution. The application will now compile to three assemblies: <YourAppName>.dll , <YourAppName>.gtpu.dll and <YourApp-

Name>Texts.dll.

2. In the Texts project add a reference to System (.Net ).

3. Set the Output type to Class Library (this is done in the Project Properties).

4. The namespace used for the Texts project must be the same as used for the main project. As the namespace is not visible in the resource file you must change it in the

Project Properties like this:

300

10.1_5

5. Add a Resources file to the project by right clicking the project in Solution Explorer and selecting Add New Item. Set the name of the file to “strings.resx". This file will contain the texts of the default language (normally English).

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

6. Open the resource file and add name and value for the texts of the default language.

Use capital letters in the name column.

6.5.1_1

7. In the Texts project create a folder with the culture short form as name, e.g. de for

German and sv for Swedish.

10.1_6

NOTE!

Russian (ru) has been added in RW/RAB 5.11.

CAUTION!

The standard short forms listed above must be used.

NOTE!

To be able to use Chinese or another language with non-western characters, you must use the FlexPendant font,

TpsFont

, for any UI controls. It internally checks what language is currently active on the FlexPendant and uses the correct font for that language.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

301

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

8. Copy the “strings.resx” file to the folder(s) created in the previous step.

9. The name of the file used for the foreign resources should be strings.<culture>.resx, e.g. “strings.sv.resx" as in the picture below. Right click the file and rename it.

10.1_4

10. Open the resource file and translate the texts in the value column. The name is the identity of the text and should remain the same.

NOTE!

Obviously, texts might get longer or shorter when translated. You may therefore need to increase the sizes of some GUI controls when you have tested the application.

2 Prepare main project for localization

Follow these steps to add localization to your main project:

Step Action

1. Add a reference to ABB.Robotics.Taf.Base in the main project.

2. In the

TpsView

attribute of the view class insert the name of the Texts dll like this:

[assembly: TpsView("ABB_MENU_TITLE_TXT","tpu-

Operator32.gif","tpu-Operator16.gif",

"TpsViewIRC5App.dll",

"TpsViewIRC5App.TpsViewIRC5App",

StartPanelLocation.Left,

TpsViewType.Static,"TpsViewLocalizedAppTexts.dll",

TpsViewStartupTypes.Manual)]

302

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

3. Declare a

TpsResourceManager

object at the top of the class as a private member variable and initialize it in the constructor.

Add a call to an

InitializeTexts

method.

//declaration private ABB.Robotics.Tps.Resources.TpsResourceManager

_tpsRM;

//constructor method

_tpsRM = new

ABB.Robotics.Tps.Resources.TpsResourceManager("TpsVi ewLocalizedApp.strings",

ABB.Robotics.Taf.Base.TafAssembly.Load("TpsViewLocal izedAppTexts.dll"));

InitializeComponent();

InitializeTexts();

NOTE!

The first constructor argument should be the name of your application with .strings as an added suffix. The second argument is the name of the assembly containing the resources.

4. Implement

InitializeTexts

( ). Use the

TpsResourceManager

object and call

GetString

( ) using the identity (name) of the text you want as argument. Depending on the active language of the FlexPendant this call will retrieve the corresponding language resource.

Example:

InitializeTexts()

{ this.Label1.Text = _tpsRM.GetString("TXT_INSTR_LABEL");

}

Leave the contents of the

InitializeComponent

method as it is, e.g.

Label1.Text = "Signals"

etc.

5. The

TpsResourceManager

object has not yet been created when the application icon and title are to appear in the ABB menu, and therefore another technique must be used to have them correctly displayed. Add a resource name for the application title and a value in the resource file of each language.

In the

TpsView

attribute the first argument is the application title. Replace it with the resource name. It may look like this:

[assembly: TpsView("ABB_MENU_TITLE_TXT", ...,...

TpsViewIRC5AppTexts.dll")]

The corresponding resource value will now be used. In case no resource is found the

name will be used as is.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

303

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

3 Build satellite assembly

Follow these steps to create a satellite assembly of the localized resx file:

Step Action

1. The localized resource file should not be built with the ordinary build process, i.e. the property Build Action should be set to “None". Right click on the strings.<cul-

ture>.resx file and select properties:

6.5.1_4

2. You should now use the Visual Studio 2005 tool resgen.exe to compile the resx file to a binary resource. After this the Visual Studio 2005 assembly linker tool al.exe should make a satellite assembly of the binary resource.

Read the following steps very carefully to make sure the satellite assembly is built correctly.

NOTE!

Localization with Visual Studio 2008 has not yet been tested.

304

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

3. Create a post-build event in the Texts project in order to automate the building process.

Example:

TpsViewLocalizedApp

with resources in Swedish: mkdir ..\..\language mkdir ..\..\language\sv mkdir ..\..\language\sv\tps cd ..\..\sv\ del *.resources

del *.dll

if exist strings.sv.resx ( resgen strings.sv.resx TpsViewLocalizedApp.strings.sv

.resources

al /t:lib /embed:TpsViewLocalizedApp.strings.sv.resources

/culture:en / out:TpsViewLocalizedAppTexts.resources.dll

copy TpsViewLocalizedAppTexts.resources.dll

..\language\sv\tps\TpsViewLocalizedAppTexts.resource

s.dll)

10.1_9

The resgen

command is written like this: resgen strings.<culture>.resx

<Namespace>.strings.<culture>.resources

where

<culture>

should be replaced with the correct language short form and

<Namespace>

should be replaced with the application namespace.

The al

command takes the resulting dll located in the same directory as the resx file and makes a satellite assembly of it: al /t:lib /embed:<Namespace>.strings.<culture>.resources / culture:en /out:<AssemblyName>.resources.dll

NOTE!

The name of the satellite assembly will be the same for all localized languages.

The third argument of the al

command, culture:en, should be “en” . The reason is that the FlexPendant operating system has English as the underlying language.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

305

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

4. It is necessary to ensure that the post-build step is executed with the correct versions of resgen.exe and al.exe. The easiest way to do this is to use a VS 2005 Command prompt to build the project (or solution) or to start Visual Studio from that prompt.

First click Windows Start menu to launch the Command Prompt (at Programs >

Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 > Visual Studio Tools).Then use the command devenv in order to start VS 2005.

Now open your solution and build it. The post-build command is now guaranteed to execute with the correct settings.

6.5.1_5

NOTE!

As default, Visual Studio will run post-build commands using the PC’s user settings

(paths etc.). If you had VS 2003 installed earlier the post-build command is therefore very likely to use the wrong versions of resgen.exe and al.exe. The procedure described above guarantees that the VS 2005 versions are used.

(These can be found at: C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 8\SDK\v2.0\bin/ resgen.exe C:\WINNT\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727/al.exe)

4 Test a localized application

In order to test a localized application, the resources must be correctly organized in the file system of the controller. This should be done in the same way either the test is done on a virtual or a real FlexPendant. Follow these steps to test the application on a real FlexPendant:

Step Action

1. Transfer, using an FTP client or the File Manager of RobotStudio, your application assemblies to the HOME directory of the active system. (TpsViewLocalizedApp-

Texts.dll, TpsViewLocalizedApp.gtpu.dll, TpsViewLocalizedApp.dll in the picture below).

306

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

2. Copy the language folder that was created by the post-build event to the HOME directory.

10.1_3

NOTE!

It is also possible to have both the assemblies and the language folder located under the SYSTEM folder one level up. The advantage of using HOME is that the files are included in a backup.

3. Verify that the language folder has folders for each language and that each tps folder have a .resources dll. If this is not the case, you need to go back to the post-build event of your Texts project and check what has gone wrong.

10.1_3b

NOTE!

The name of the satellite assembly is the same for all languages, TpsViewLocal-

izedAppTexts.resources.dll in the example above.

4. Switch to another language (Control Panel - Languages) and restart the FlexPendant.

5. Verify that the name of your application in the ABB menu is correct.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

307

9 Localizing a FlexPendant application

9.1. Adding support for several languages

Continued

Step Action

6. Open the application and verify that the GUI texts are correctly displayed. Especially verify that text boxes, labels, listview columns etc. are wide enough to display the translated texts.

308 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.1.1. Overview

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.1 Deployment of a PC SDK application

10.1.1. Overview

Introduction

When your application is ready it has to be deployed to the customer’s PC. This chapter gives information about the facilities for deployment included in the RAB installation.

NOTE!

Neither RAB nor a RAB licence need to be installed on the PC that will host your application.

Furthermore, from RAB 5.10 you do NOT need to add the licence key to your project as described in

Licenses.licx on page 40

, as deployed PC applications no longer perform license verification when executing.

Facilities for deployment

In the redistributable folder at C:\Program Files\ABB Industrial IT\Robotics IT\Robot

Application Builder\ there are some files to be used for deployment of a PC SDK application:

• ABBControllerAPI.msm

•

ABB Industrial Robot Communication Runtime.msi

These two packages include all dependencies a PC SDK application has apart from .NET 2.0.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

309

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.1.1. Overview

Continued

ABBControllerAPI.msm

A PC SDK application cannot execute without the PC SDK assemblies it references. For your convenience, the ABBControllerAPI merge module contains the PC SDK assemblies. Add it to your install program to have them installed in the Global Assembly Cache (GAC).

The GAC is automatically installed with the .NET runtime. It enables a PC to share assemblies across numerous applications. If the customer’s PC has Robot Studio Online of the same release as the PS SDK used to create the application the PC SDK dlls your application needs should be in the GAC already.

NOTE!

If you want to create an msi file (or a setup.exe) of the msm file, you can include the

ABBControllerAPI.msm file in a Visual Studio SetUp Project.

NOTE!

Before, ABBControllerAPI.msm worked only with InstallShield. This problem has now been resolved.

ABB Industrial Robot Communication Runtime.msi

For a PC SDK application to be able to connect to a controller either RobotStudio or Robot

Communications Runtime is required. If RobotStudio is not installed on the PC that will host your application, Robot Communications Runtime needs to be included in your installation.

ABB Industrial Robot Communication Runtime.msi can be used for redistribution as a separate installation.

310 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.1. Overview

10.2 Deployment of a FlexPendant SDK application

10.2.1. Overview

Introduction

For the end customer to be able to use your application, it has to be deployed to the customer’s robot controller. This is done when the customer robot system is created, by using the System

Builder in RobotStudio. The custom application can then either be added as an additional option by using a license key, or added to the Home directory of the controller file system by using one of the dialogs of the System Builder wizard.

For an application with multi-language support there are a few more things to deal with.

NOTE!

Using an FTP client to upload the application from a PC to a robot controller can be done for testing purposes. It can also be done if the custom application needs to be added to an existing system, which is already running in production. See

Deployment using FTP on page 318

for information about how this is done.

Making a product

These are the steps to make a product of a custom FlexPendant application:

1. Approval of the FP SDK product requirement specification.

2. Design and development of a FP SDK GUI prototype.

3. Approval of the FP SDK GUI prototype.

4. Design and development of a FP SDK functional prototype.

5. Approval of the FP SDK functional prototype.

6. Design and development of a FP SDK product.

7. Approval of the FP SDK product.

8. Design and development of a deployable FP SDK product.

Deployment of a FlexPendant SDK product

Before deploying a custom application you need to consider these issues:

• Should the product be licensed, i.e. be sold as an option?

•

Is there a need to localize the product, i.e. create support for native languages?

Depending on how the above questions are answered there are four alternatives (detailed separately in the following sections of this manual):

1. License and localization

2. License but no localization

3. No license but localization

4. No license and no localization

NOTE!

If the product is to be licensed it should be deployed as an additional option. If not,

RobotStudio should be used to deploy the application to the Home directory of the system.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 311

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.2. Deployment of an application without a license

10.2.2. Deployment of an application without a license

Overview

If you do not make an additional option of your application, the end user does not need a license to use it.

When the customer system is created, by using the System Builder of RobotStudio, your application should be added to the Home directory of the system.

This section gives information about how this is done. The easiest alternative, which offers no support for additional languages, is explained first.

No license and no localization

This is how you deploy an application without license nor multi-language support.

Step Action

1. Use System Builder in RobotStudio.

2. Add the application assemblies(.dll) and other resources (‘.jpg, *.gif,*.bmp) to the

Home directory:

312

10.1_2

3. Download the system to the robot controller.

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.2. Deployment of an application without a license

Continued

NOTE!

Having the application deployed to the Home directory means it will be included in a system backup.

No license but localization

This is how you deploy an application with no license but with multi-language support.

Step Action

1. Implement multi-language support. See

Localizing a FlexPendant application on page 299

for information on how to do it.

2. Use System Builder in RobotStudio.

3. Add the application assemblies(.dlls) and other resources (‘.jpg, *.gif,*.bmp) to the

Home directory:

10.1_2

Note! TpsViewIRC5AppTexts.dll is missing in the figure.

4. Generate the robot system.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

313

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.2. Deployment of an application without a license

Continued

Step Action

5. In the generated RobotWare system, add a language directory with all supported languages in the Home directory. Then for each supported language, add a culture specific and a tps directory.

10.1_3

NOTE!

Standard names (de, zh etc.) must be used for the different languages. See

1 Create project for text resources on page 300

for the complete list.

6. Transfer each resource binary to the tps sub-directory of the respective culture directory, e.g.:

TpsViewIRC5App.strings.de.resources.dll to language/de/tps directory etc.

7. Download the system to the robot controller.

See

Localizing a FlexPendant application on page 299

for information on how to add

support for native languages to your custom application.

314 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.3. Deployment of a licensed application

10.2.3. Deployment of a licensed application

Overview

When the customer system is created by System Builder of RobotStudio, a FlexPendant application can be added to the system as an additional option.

This section describes how to make the additional option, which is necessary for deployment of a licensed custom application. It also describes how the customer installs the option.

CAUTION!

An additional option must be distributed in accordance with RobotWare version and revision.

Pay attention if you are using functionality, which has been included in a revision!

NOTE!

An additional option must be deployed with the structure of RobotStudio.

Procedure for making an additional option

This is how you make an additional option of a FlexPendant SDK application.

Step Action

1. Implement multi-language support if considered necessary. See

Localizing a

FlexPendant application on page 299

for information on how to do it.

2. Order a license and a CD Key Maker from your local ABB office, who will in turn contact ABB SEROP product support in Sweden.

3. Create the following structure:

10.1_12

The language folder is needed if there is to be support for other languages.

NOTE!

Always use capital letters for the option name.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

Continues on next page

315

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.3. Deployment of a licensed application

Continued

Step Action

4. Create the version.xml file. It may look like this:

10.1_13

5. Create the install.cmd file. It may look like this:

10.1_14

6. Create relkey.txt file. It may look like this:

10.1_15

7. With the license, which is entered in the CD key Maker, generate a key file including the serial number of the Robot controller, e.g. MYOPTION508.kxt

(This is the file the user will enter in System Builder when the robot system is created.)

8. Package the product on CD the way your organization recommends.

NOTE!

If the option is only a FlexPendant SDK application the described procedure is enough. But if the option should also include RAPID and configuration, you need to read about how to make an additional option in another manual, which is for ABB internal use. See Related

information at the end of this section.

Installing the option at the customer

This is the how the customer installs a licensed application:

1. Install the additional option from a CD.

2. Create the robot system by using System Builder.

3. In the Add Parameters/Add Additional Options dialog browse to the key file, e.g.

MYOPTION508.kxt which came with the installation of the additional option.

316

Continues on next page

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.3. Deployment of a licensed application

Continued

10.1_16

Related information

Application manual - Additional Options, 3HAC023668-001

The manual is intended for ABB use only. Contact After Sales in Västerås, Sweden.

3HAC028083-001 Revision: D 317

10 Packaging RAB applications

10.2.4. Deployment using FTP

10.2.4. Deployment using FTP

Overview

The general rule is that deployment using an FTP client should only be done during the development phase.

If deployment to a customer is done this way each controller has to be individually updated with assembly files as well as graphical and language resources. The organization of files in the robot controller file system is the responsibility of the application developer or the system integrator.

Procedure

Follow these steps to deploy your application using for example the File Manager of

RobotStudio or an FTP client such as Ftp Voyager:

4

5

6

Step Action

1

2

3

On the controller navigate to the system you want to update with the FlexPendant application.

Transfer the assembly, the proxy assembly and graphical resources used by the application to the system directory Home.

For multi-language support, in the Language directory create sub-directories for each language using the short name of the culture.

Create a “tps” sub-directory in each of these directories.

Copy each language resource to the tps folder of the corresponding culture.

Restart the FlexPendant. The custom application should now be accessible from the

ABB menu.

See

Restart the FlexPendant on page 49

for information about how to restart the

FlexPendant but not the controller.

318 3HAC028083-001 Revision: D

ABB AB

Robotics Products

S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS

SWEDEN

Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000

Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592